`
RAM CHASSIS CAB
2021 OWNER’S MANUAL
2021 RAM CHASSIS CAB
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
U.S.
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, RADIO AND
WARRANTY BOOKS
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
First Edition V1
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting
in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature
that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving
is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this
vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC
reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without
imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase
replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except
as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................9
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................15
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 80
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................ 118
5 MULTIMEDIA ..............................................................................................................................220
6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................ 273
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................334
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 353
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................431
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................445
11 INDEX ............................................................................................................................................ 450
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
Symbols Key..........................................................10
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS..........................10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.........10
Symbol Glossary...................................................11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ......................................................................15
Key Fob......................................................... 15
SENTRY KEY ..........................................................17
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................18
Keyless Push Button Ignition ......................18
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) ..20
How To Use Remote Start ........................... 20
To Exit Remote Start Mode ......................... 21
Remote Start Front Defrost
Activation — If Equipped.............................. 21
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped ................................................... 21
Remote Start Abort Message......................22
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) .........22
How To Use Remote Start ........................... 23
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...23
To Arm The System...................................... 23
To Disarm The System................................. 24
Rearming Of The System............................. 24
Security System Manual Override .............. 24
DOORS .................................................................. 24
Manual Door Locks...................................... 24
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ............... 25
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
(If Equipped) ................................................ 26
Automatic Unlock Doors On
Exit — If Equipped ........................................ 28
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ......... 28
Child-Protection Door Lock — If Equipped.. 28
STEERING WHEEL ............................................... 29
Tilt Steering Column .................................... 29
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ....... 29
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION....................... 30
Introducing Voice Recognition .................... 30
Basic Voice Commands............................... 31
Get Started................................................... 31
Additional Information................................. 31
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED... 32
Programming The Memory Feature............ 32
Linking And Unlinking The Remote
Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory ............. 32
Memory Position Recall............................... 33
SEATS .................................................................... 33
Manual Front Seat Adjustment................... 34
Power Driver Seat Adjustment —
If Equipped................................................... 35
Heated Seats — If Equipped ....................... 36
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped................... 37
Head Restraints........................................... 38
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IF EQUIPPED .........................................................40
MIRRORS ..............................................................41
Inside Rearview Mirror ................................ 41
Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped..... 43
Outside Mirrors ........................................... 44
Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped.................................... 44
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...................... 44
Power Convex Mirror Switch —
If Equipped................................................... 45
Trailer Towing Mirrors.................................. 46
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................... 46
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped ... 46
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature................. 46
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED ...........................47
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®.................................................. 47
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....... 47
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device .............. 47
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener................................................. 48
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device ................................. 49
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button........................................................... 49
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 50
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................50
Headlight Switch.......................................... 50
Multifunction Lever...................................... 51
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) ................. 51
High/Low Beam Switch ............................... 51
Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control — If Equipped .................................. 52
Flash-To-Pass ...............................................52
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......... 52
Directional LED Headlamp
System — If Equipped ..................................52
Parking Lights And Panel Lights ................. 53
Automatic Headlights With Wipers ............. 53
Headlight Delay............................................ 53
Lights-On Reminder..................................... 53
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .................. 53
Turn Signals ................................................. 54
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............. 54
Cargo Lights/Trailer Spotter Lights — If
Equipped ...................................................... 54
Battery Saver................................................54
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................55
Courtesy Lights ............................................ 55
Illuminated Entry .........................................56
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS.............56
Windshield Wiper Operation ...................... 57
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ...........58
CLIMATE CONTROLS ........................................... 58
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions .............................................. 59
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions...................................................... 62
Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) ................................................ 64
Climate Voice Recognition .......................... 65
Operating Tips ............................................. 65
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ............. 66
Storage ......................................................... 66
USB/AUX Control ........................................ 72
Electrical Power Outlets .............................. 73
Power Inverter — If Equipped ..................... 74
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ........ 76
WINDOWS ............................................................ 76
Power Windows — If Equipped.................... 76
Automatic Window Features —
If Equipped................................................... 77
Reset Auto-Up ............................................. 77
Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped....... 78
Power Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped .................................................. 78
Manual Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped................................................... 78
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 78
HOOD ..................................................................... 79
To Open The Hood ...................................... 79
To Close The Hood....................................... 79
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
GASOLINE ..............................................................80
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster
Descriptions................................................. 81
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
GASOLINE ..............................................................83
Premium Instrument Cluster
Descriptions................................................. 84
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
DIESEL....................................................................85
Diesel Instrument Cluster .......................... 86
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL ..... 88
Diesel Instrument Cluster .......................... 89
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .......................90
Instrument Cluster Display Controls .......... 90
Oil Life Reset ............................................... 91
Display Menu Items..................................... 92
Diesel Messages And Warnings ...............101
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ...............................105
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ............... 107
Red Warning Lights ...................................107
Yellow Warning Lights ...............................110
Yellow Indicator Lights ..............................113
Green Indicator Lights...............................115
White Indicator Lights ...............................115
Blue Indicator Lights .................................116
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ... 116
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity................................116
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ........................................................ 117
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE
ENGINE ............................................................... 118
Automatic Transmission............................118
Tip Start Feature .......................................118
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition...................118
Normal Starting Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button .................................119
AutoPark — Rotary Shifter and Eight
Speed Transmission Only..........................120
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) .........................122
After Starting..............................................122
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE..... 122
Automatic Transmission............................123
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition...................123
Extreme Cold Weather...............................125
Normal Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold
Air Temperature Above 66°F (19°C) .......125
Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold
Air Temperature 0°F To 66°F
(–18°C to 19°C)........................................126
Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Air
Temperature Below 0°F (-18°C)..............127
Starting Fluids............................................128
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE........128
Cold Weather Precautions ........................129
Engine Idling .............................................131
Noise...........................................................132
Stopping The Engine .................................133
Idle Shutdown ............................................133
Programmable Maximum Vehicle
Speed .........................................................134
Operating Precautions...............................134
Cooling System Tips ..................................134
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Manual
Regeneration - If Equipped .......................135
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ........135
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE ............................................136
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE...................................................137
PARKING BRAKE ...............................................137
DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE
(ENGINE BRAKING) ...........................................138
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION............................140
Ignition Park Interlock ...............................141
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System .......................................................141
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped ....................................................141
Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission — If Equipped .....................146
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED........... 152
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 153
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Eight
Speed Transmission) — If Equipped ........153
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Six Speed Transmission) — If Equipped..156
Manually Shifted Transfer Case —
If Equipped................................................. 160
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL .......................... 162
POWER TAKE OFF (PTO) OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED .......................................................... 163
POWER STEERING............................................. 163
Hydraulic Power Steering..........................163
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 164
Cruise Control — If Equipped ...................164
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) —
If Equipped ................................................166
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED ..................................... 177
ParkSense Sensors ...................................178
ParkSense Warning Display......................178
ParkSense Display.....................................178
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........181
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System........................................................182
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............182
ParkSense System Usage Precautions....182
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 183
LaneSense Operation................................183
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................184
LaneSense Warning Message ..................184
Changing LaneSense Status.....................186
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ............ 186
AUX Camera — If Equipped .......................188
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED ........................................................... 189
AUX Camera — If Equipped .......................194
ENGINE RUNAWAY............................................ 195
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE
ENGINE................................................................ 195
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ................196
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL
ENGINE ............................................................... 196
Diesel Exhaust Fluid ..................................196
VEHICLE LOADING ............................................ 199
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ......199
Payload.......................................................199
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ............200
Tire Size......................................................200
Rim Size......................................................200
Inflation Pressure ......................................200
Curb Weight................................................200
Loading.......................................................200
TRAILER TOWING...............................................200
Common Towing Definitions .....................201
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer
Weight ........................................................204
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .........................................205
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................205
Towing Requirements ...............................205
Towing Tips ................................................211
SNOWPLOW — IF EQUIPPED ............................212
Before Plowing...........................................212
Snowplow Prep Package Model
Availability ..................................................212
Over The Road Operation With Snowplow
Attached .....................................................213
Operating Tips............................................213
General Maintenance................................213
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME) ...................................................214
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle........................................................214
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Models........................................................215
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models........................................................215
DRIVING TIPS......................................................218
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ...................218
Driving Through Water ..............................218
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ....................................... 220
CYBERSECURITY ............................................... 220
UCONNECT 3.0................................................... 221
Introduction................................................221
Radio Mode................................................222
Media Mode...............................................224
Phone Mode...............................................225
UCONNECT SETTINGS ....................................... 228
Customer Programmable Features..........228
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION.............................. 244
System Overview ......................................244
Safety And General Information ...............246
UCONNECT MODES ........................................... 247
Steering Wheel Audio Controls.................247
Radio Mode ...............................................247
Media Mode ..............................................255
Phone Mode ..............................................258
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.... 269
Regulatory And Safety Information ..........269
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED .................. 270
Off-Road Pages Status Bar .......................270
Vehicle Dynamics ......................................271
Accessory Gauge .......................................271
Pitch & Roll.................................................272
Forward Facing Camera............................272
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ............................................ 273
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................273
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...274
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ........................ 281
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped............................281
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) ..........................................284
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .................. 292
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....292
Important Safety Precautions ...................293
Seat Belt Systems .....................................293
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...302
Child Restraints..........................................312
SAFETY TIPS ...................................................... 330
Transporting Passengers ..........................330
Transporting Pets ......................................330
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................330
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle...................................332
Exhaust Gas ...............................................333
Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................333
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .......................334
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.....335
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING........................339
4500/5500 Models ..................................339
Preparations For Jacking...........................339
Jacking Instructions 4500 And
5500 Series ...............................................340
To Stow The Flat Or Spare —
If Equipped ................................................343
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped ...343
JUMP STARTING ................................................344
Preparations For Jump Start.....................344
Jump Starting Procedure ..........................345
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .........................346
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE — 6–SPEED
TRANSMISSION .................................................347
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 – SPEED
TRANSMISSION .................................................348
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............................349
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ........................350
Two-Wheel Drive Models...........................351
Four-Wheel Drive Models..........................351
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ......352
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) .................................................352
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) .......................352
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE
ENGINE................................................................ 353
Maintenance Plan .....................................354
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE .. 357
Oil Change Indicator System — Cummins
Diesel..........................................................357
Perform Service Indicator — Cummins
Diesel .........................................................358
Maintenance Plan — Cummins Diesel
Engine ....................................................... 359
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 364
6.4L Engine ...............................................364
6.7L Engine................................................365
Checking Oil Level .....................................366
Adding Washer Fluid .................................366
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................366
Pressure Washing......................................367
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .................................. 367
Engine Oil ..................................................368
Engine Oil Filter..........................................369
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ...........................369
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................371
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...............374
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter.......375
Engine Mounted Fuel Filter
Replacement..............................................376
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter
Replacement..............................................377
Priming If The Engine Has Run Out
Of Fuel .......................................................378
Intervention Regeneration Strategy —
Message Process Flow .............................379
Diesel Exhaust Fluid ..................................379
Body Lubrication........................................380
Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................380
Exhaust System ........................................382
Cooling System .........................................383
Charge Air Cooler — Inter-Cooler ..............386
Brake System ............................................387
Automatic Transmission............................387
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle
Fluid Level ..................................................390
Transfer Case ............................................391
Noise Control System Required
Maintenance & Warranty .........................391
TIRES ................................................................... 406
Tire Safety Information .............................406
Tires — General Information .....................414
Tire Types ...................................................418
Spare Tires — If Equipped .........................419
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ....................421
Snow Traction Devices .............................422
Tire Rotation Recommendations..............424
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .....................................425
Treadwear ..................................................426
Traction Grades .........................................426
Temperature Grades .................................426
STORING THE VEHICLE .....................................427
BODYWORK ........................................................427
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......427
Body And Underbody Maintenance..........427
Preserving The Bodywork..........................428
INTERIORS .........................................................428
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................428
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................429
Leather Surfaces .......................................430
Glass Surfaces ..........................................430
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ..... 431
BRAKE SYSTEM ................................................ 431
Hydraulic Brake Assist — If Equipped.......431
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS................................................ 432
Torque Specifications................................432
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE
ENGINE................................................................ 433
6.4L Engine................................................433
Reformulated Gasoline ............................433
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................434
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ....................434
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles......................................................434
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ..435
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline.................. 435
Fuel System Cautions................................435
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE ...... 436
Fuel Specifications ...................................436
Biodiesel Fuel Requirements....................437
FLUID CAPACITIES ............................................ 439
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................ 440
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............... 444
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................. 445
Prepare For The Appointment...................445
Prepare A List.............................................445
Be Reasonable With Requests .................445
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...............................445
FCA US LLC Customer Center ...................446
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........446
Mexico ........................................................446
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............446
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................446
Service Contract .......................................446
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 447
MOPAR PARTS................................................... 447
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 447
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................447
In Canada...................................................448
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 448
General Information.......................................... 449
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Ram. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and
maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the
two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited
for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces.
Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to
overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 218.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC
offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications
carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help
ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement
of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons.
For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and
care about your satisfaction.
1
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/
body builders. US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section
2.1.C. Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of
the Warranty Information. Such equipment includes video monitors,
DVD/Blu-Ray™, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage
and service on these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the
conversion/camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your
vehicle. For any additional instructions, please contact your conversion/
camper manufacturer.
To obtain dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle,
refer to the Body Builder’s Guide at https://www.ramtrucks.com/
ram-commercial/body-builders-guide.html.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information
on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important
to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the
definition of each symbol Ú page 107.
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 107
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 107
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 107
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 108
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 108
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 108
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 108
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 108
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 109
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 109
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 109
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
Ú page 109
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 109
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 110
Red Warning Lights
1
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
Yellow Warning Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 110
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
Ú page 110
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 111
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 111
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 111
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 111
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
Ú page 111
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 111
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 111
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 113
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 113
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 113
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
Ú page 113
Yellow Warning Lights
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 113
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
Ú page 113
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 113
Cargo Light — If Equipped
Ú page 113
Snowplow Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 113
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 114
Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 114
4WD Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 114
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 114
4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 114
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 114
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 114
Wait To Start Light — If Equipped
Ú page 114
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 114
Yellow Indicator Lights
1
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 115
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 115
Automatic Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 115
ECO Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 115
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Ú page 115
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 115
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 115
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 115
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 115
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
Ú page 115
Set Speed Display
Ú page 115
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 116
Green Indicator Lights
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
15
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) (if
equipped) and Keyless Enter-N-Go (if equipped).
If the vehicle is equipped with remote power
door locks, the key fob allows you to lock or
unlock all doors, as well as activate the Panic
Alarm, from distances up to approximately 66 ft
(20 m). The key fob does not need to be pointed
at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked
if the key fob is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop, or other electronic device.
This may result in poor performance.
The key fob should not be placed next to the
wireless charging pad (if equipped).
In the ON/RUN position, all key fob buttons
will work until the vehicle reaches 2 mph
(4 km/h).
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
can be verified by referring to the instrument
cluster, which will display directions to follow.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors
If the vehicle is equipped with remote power
door locks, push and release the unlock button
on the key fob once to unlock the driver’s door.
Push the unlock button twice within five
seconds to unlock all doors. If the vehicle is
equipped with remote power door locks, push
and release the lock button on the key fob to
lock all doors.
1 — Unlock
2 — Lock
3 — Remote Start
4 — PANIC
5 — Emergency Key
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals
will flash and the illuminated entry system will
be activated. When the doors are locked, the
turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button. The horn chirp
when the lock button is pushed can be
programmed on/off within Uconnect Settings
Ú
page 228.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery model is one CR2450
battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a
battery obtained from Mopar. Aftermarket
coin battery dimensions may not meet the
original OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling
may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
1. Remove the emergency key (1) by pushing
and holding the release button (2) located
on the side of the key fob while pulling the
emergency key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing
down, and locate the small rectangular gap
on the left side between the housing and
the back cover of the key fob. Use a small
screw driver (or similar tool) to pry open the
left side of the fob cover while applying
pressure until the cover snaps open.
3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the
key fob, which is positioned further to the
edge than the left side gap. Pry open the
right side, and remove the back cover.
4. Remove the battery by using your thumb to
slide the battery downward and back
toward the key ring.
Key Fob Battery Location
NOTE:
When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign
on the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching
the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may
cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
1 — Emergency Key
2 — Emergency Key Release Button
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to
push down and slide the battery under the
small lip on the top edge of the opening.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the
top edge of the back cover with the top of
the fob, and press the edges into the
interlocking hinges until all edges snap
together with no large visual gaps.
7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks
into place.
NOTE:
The key fob battery should only be replaced by
qualified technicians. If the battery requires
replacement, see an authorized dealer.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be re-purposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer Ú page 449.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver
to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key
fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics.
In addition, if the light begins to flash after the
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF mode.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
bulb check, it indicates that someone
attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to
start the engine but there is an issue with the
vehicle electronics, the engine will start and
shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics Ú page 449.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS PUSH BUTTON IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long
as the Remote Keyless Entry key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four
operating positions; three of which are labeled
and will illuminate when in position. The three
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth
position is START. During START, RUN will
illuminate.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of
the emergency key) of the key fob against the
START/STOP ignition button, with your foot
applied on the brake pedal, and push to
operate the ignition switch.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
(Continued)
ACC
Engine is not started.
Some electrical devices are available
(e.g. power windows etc.).
RUN
Driving position.
All the electrical devices are available
(e.g. climate controls, heated seats, etc.).
START
The engine will start.
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
Back Up Starting Method
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the
vehicle Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and
prevent the Keyless Enter-N-Go system from
starting the vehicle.
For more information on the engine starting
procedure, see Ú page 118.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
(GASOLINE)
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
Remote start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in
all ambient conditions before the driver enters
the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key
fob may reduce this range Ú page 449.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The parking
lights will flash, vehicle doors will lock, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Once the
vehicle has started, the engine will run for
15 minutes.
Pushing the remote start button a third time
shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button,
insert the key into the ignition, and turn to the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote
Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position before the Remote Start sequence
can be repeated for a third cycle.
If your power door locks were unlocked,
Remote Start will automatically lock the
doors.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle Security system not active
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote
Start system, push and release the START/STOP
ignition button while pressing the brake pedal
prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off
with another push and release of the Remote
Start button on the key fob, or if the engine is
allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume the
previously set operations (temperature, blower
control, etc.).
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP igni-
tion button.
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the
system will disable for two seconds after
receiving a valid Remote Start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When remote start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
system will automatically activate front defrost for
15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on the
ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, the
system will automatically adjust the settings
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When remote start is activated, the front and
rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel and driver
heated seat feature will turn on if programmed
in the comfort menu screen within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 228. In warm weather, the
driver vented seat feature will automatically
turn on when the remote start is activated and
is programmed in the comfort menu screen.
The vehicle will adjust the climate control
settings depending on the outside ambient
temperature.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to an
optimal temperature and mode, dependent on
the outside ambient temperature. When the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
climate controls will resume their previous
settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If
Equipped
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C)
to 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be
based on the last settings selected by the
driver.
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to MAX
A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 58.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration
of remote start, or until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position. The climate control
settings will change, and exit the automatic
defaults, if manually adjusted by the driver
while the vehicle is in remote start mode.
This includes turning the climate controls off
using the OFF button.
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays
active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL)
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
Remote start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in
all ambient conditions before the driver enters
the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and the
key fob may reduce this range.
The Remote Start system will wait for the
Wait To Start Light Ú page 114 to extinguish
before cranking the engine. This allows time
for the intake heater to preheat the incoming
air, and is normal operation in cold weather.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and
the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then,
the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain
in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
Pushing the remote start button a third time
shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button,
insert the key into the ignition, and turn to the
ON/RUN position.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
Water In Fuel Indicator Light is not illuminated
Wait To Start Light is not illuminated
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illumi-
nated
For additional functions of the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 21
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the
vehicle doors and ignition for unauthorized
operation. When the Vehicle Security system is
activated, interior switches for door locks are
disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security system will provide the
following audible and visible signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The vehicle security light in the instrument
cluster will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,
make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
system is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior
power door lock switch with the driver
and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone Ú page 26.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
The Vehicle Security system will set when you
use the power door locks, or use the key fob to
lock the doors. After all the doors are locked
and closed, the vehicle security light, in the
instrument panel cluster, will flash rapidly for
about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is
being set. After the alarm is set, the vehicle
security light will flash at a slower rate to
indicate that the system is armed.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
1. Push the unlock button on the key fob.
2. Grab the Passive Entry Door Handle with a
valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
Passive Entry door handle (if equipped)
Ú page 26.
3. Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security
system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system
will turn the horn off after 29 seconds,
five seconds between cycles, and up to eight
cycles if the trigger remains active. The Vehicle
Security system will then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked
from inside the vehicle by using the door lock
knob. To lock each door, push the door lock
knob on each door trim panel downward.
To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim
panel upward. If the lock knob is down when the
door is closed, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle
before closing the door.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
(Continued)
Door Lock Knob
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
The power door lock switches are located on
each front door panel. Push the switch to lock or
unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switches
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the
keys are found inside the vehicle when the door
lock button on the front door panel is used to
lock the door. This will occur for two attempts.
Upon the third attempt, the doors will lock even
if the key is inside.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
For personal security and safety in the
event of an collision, lock the vehicle doors
as you drive as well as when you park and
leave the vehicle.
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK, apply
the parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF,
remove the key fobs from vehicle, and lock
all doors. and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless
signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door
may not unlock automatically.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the
ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's
door is open, the doors will not lock.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
E
NTRY (IF EQUIPPED )
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows
you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s)
without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 228.
If wearing gloves or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle,
the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm
the security alarm.
The Vehicle Security system can be armed/
disarmed by pushing the Passive Entry key
fob lock/unlock buttons (if equipped).
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other elec-
tronic device; these devices may block the key
fob's wireless signal and prevent the Passive
Entry door handle from locking/unlocking the
vehicle.
To Unlock From The Driver or Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock
all doors automatically. The interior door panel
lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is
programmed all doors will unlock when you
grab hold of the front driver’s door handle.
You can select between “Unlock Driver Door
1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 228.
All doors will unlock when the front
passenger door handle is grabbed regardless
of the driver’s door unlock preference
setting.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle:
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door
panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all
open doors have been closed the vehicle checks
the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid
Passive Entry key fobs. If one of the vehicle's
Passive Entry key fobs is detected inside the
vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry key fobs
are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive
Entry system automatically unlocks all vehicle
doors and chirps the horn three times (on the
third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry key fob can be locked in the vehicle).
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger
front door handles, push the door handle lock
button to lock all doors.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle lock button,
you must wait two seconds before you can
lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive
Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle, without the vehicle unlocking.
The Passive Entry system depends on a key
fob that is not fully discharged of its coin
battery capacity.
When the key fob battery is low, the instrument
cluster will display a message indicating that
the key fob battery is low
Ú
page 15.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the key fob lock button or the lock button
located on the vehicle’s interior door panel
Ú page 449.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON
E
XIT — IF EQUIPPED
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks after the following
sequence of actions:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
feature is enabled.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The transmission gear selector was not in
PARK, then is placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — IF
E
QUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature
is enabled/disabled in the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 228.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK — IF
E
QUIPPED
To provide a safer environment for children riding
in the rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of
your vehicle have the Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and
rotate the dial to engage and disengage the
Child-Protection locks. When the system on a
door is engaged, that door can only be opened
by using the outside door handle even if the
inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
Child Lock Control
NOTE:
After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside
to make certain it is in the desired position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the door lock switch to the unlock posi-
tion, roll down the window, and open the door
with the outside door handle.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors cannot
be opened from the inside door handle when
the Child Protection Door Locks are engaged.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
STEERING WHEEL
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. The tilt lever is
located on the steering column, below the
multifunction lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to
unlock the steering column. With one hand
firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering
column up or down, as desired. Release the
lever to lock the steering column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Lever
HEATED S TEERING W HEEL — I F E QUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
the operator turns it off. The heated steering
wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located on the center instrument panel below
the touchscreen, as well as within the climate or
controls screen of the touchscreen.
Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 21.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR)
system.
Uconnect 3.0
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in
the Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen,
you have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not,
you have a Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch display
system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
Voice Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate /deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first
push the VR button, wait until after the beep,
then say your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR button
and saying a Voice Command from the
current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc
Ú
page 449.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
1 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
2 — Push To Initiate, Answer, End A Phone Call, Or
Send/Receive A Text
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to
two different memory profiles for easy recall
through a memory switch. Each memory profile
saves desired position settings for the following
features:
Driver seat position
Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (on/off)
(if equipped)
Side mirrors
Adjustable pedals (if equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
If equipped with power convex mirrors, these
mirror positions will not set as part of a
memory profile.
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs,
one key fob can be linked to memory position
1 and the other key fob can be linked to
memory position 2.
The driver memory settings switch is located on
the driver door, next to the door handle, and
consists of three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate
the memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two saved memory profiles.
Driver Memory Settings Buttons
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside
mirrors, adjustable pedals (if equipped),
and radio station presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory
switch, and then push the desired memory
button (1 or 2) within five seconds.
The instrument cluster display will display
which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in PARK.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE
K
EYLESS ENTRY KEY FOB TO MEMORY
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one
of two saved memory profiles by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must
select the “Personal Settings Linked to Key
Fob” feature through the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 228.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push
and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Push and release button (1) or (2)
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2)
will display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, and
within 10 seconds, pushing the unlock button
on the key fob.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
The vehicle speed must be lower than 5 mph
(8 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a recall
is attempted when the vehicle speed is greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h), a message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or
two, push the desired memory button number
(1 or 2) or the unlock button on the key fob
linked to the desired memory position.
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the
memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When
a recall is canceled, the driver's seat and the
adjustable pedals (if equipped) stop moving.
A delay of one second will occur before another
recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MANUAL FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Both front seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle
is located under the seat cushion at the front
edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle
and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release
the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure
that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side
of the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward
slightly, lift the lever, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the
seatback to its normal upright position, lean
forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seat back is in the upright position.
Manual Recline Lever
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The
outboard seat portions are each 40% of the
total width of the seat. On some models, the
back of the center portion (20%) easily folds
down to provide an armrest/center storage
compartment.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while
actuating the handle. The seatback may swing
forward and hit you causing injury.
To avoid injury, place your hand on the seat-
back and actuate the handle, then position
the seatback in the desired position.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
POWER DRIVER SEAT ADJUSTMENT — IF
E
QUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with an
eight-way power driver's seat. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the
driver's seat cushion. There are two power seat
switches that are used to control the movement
of the seat cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the power seat switch.
The seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down by using the power seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
up or down using the power seat switch.
The front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward by using the power seat
switch. The seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached.
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or
passenger seats may also be equipped with
power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is
located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support.
Lumbar Control Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends
on where you have the driver’s seat positioned
when you remove the key fob from the ignition.
When you place the ignition in the OFF posi-
tion, the driver’s seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver’s
seat position is greater than or equal to
2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the ignition into the
ACC or RUN position.
When you place the ignition in the OFF position,
the driver’s seat will move to a position
0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if
the driver’s seat position is between 0.9 inches
and 2.7 inches (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward
of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previ-
ously set position when you place the ignition to
the ACC or RUN position.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is disabled when
the driver’s seat position is less than
0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
At this position, there is no benefit to the driver
by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each
memory setting profile Ú page 32.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or
disabled through the programmable features in
the Uconnect system Ú page 228.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
On some models, the front and rear seats may
be equipped with heaters located in the seat
cushions and seat backs.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Front Heated Seats
The heated seats control buttons are located on
the center instrument panel below the
touchscreen, and are also located within the
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
Push the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second
time to turn the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time
to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a fourth time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until
the operator changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 21.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard rear seats
are equipped with heated seats. The heated
seat switches for these seats are located on the
rear of the center console.
There are two heated seat switches that allow
the rear passengers to operate the seats
independently. You can choose from HI, MED,
LO, or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights
in each switch indicate the level of heat in use.
Push the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second
time to turn the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time
to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a fourth time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The level of heat selected will stay on until
the operator changes it.
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Front Ventilated Seats
Located in the seat cushion are small fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment
and move air through fine perforations in the seat
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger
cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans
operate at three speeds, HI, MED and LO.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located on the center instrument panel below
the touchscreen, and are also located within the
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second
time to choose MED.
Press the ventilated seat button a third
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a fourth
time to turn the ventilation off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 21.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back
of your head.
Front Head Restraints
Four-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with front
four-way driver and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button, located at the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the
top of the head restraint toward the front of the
vehicle as desired and release. To adjust the
head restraint rearward, pull the top of the head
restraint to the forward most position and
release. The head restraint will return to the
rear most position.
Forward Adjustment
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE:
Four-way head restraints have seven tilt/
locking positions. When pulling fully forward,
the head restraint will spring back to the
untilted, rearward most position when released.
Two-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with front
two-way driver and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench
seat, the center head restraint is not adjustable
or removable.
Front Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, push the
adjustment button and the release button
while pulling upward on the whole assembly.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the
appropriate height.
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable
and removable head restraints. To raise the
head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button located on the base of the
head restraint and push downward on the head
restraint.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Release/Adjustment Buttons
NOTE:
The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab)
has only one adjustment position that is used
to aid in the routing of a tether Ú page 292.
Do not reposition the head restraint
180 degrees to the incorrect position in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the
back of the head.
Rear Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, push the
adjustment button and the release button
while pulling upward on the whole assembly.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to
the appropriate height.
NOTE:
To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat
bottom must be folded up.
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF
EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to
allow a greater range of driver comfort for
steering wheel tilt and seat position. This feature
allows the brake and accelerator pedals to move
toward or away from the driver to provide
improved position with the steering wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left
side of the steering column.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition in
the OFF position.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is
in REVERSE or when the Cruise Control system is on.
If there is an attempt to adjust the pedals when the
system is locked out, the following messages will
appear (on vehicles equipped with an instrument
cluster display):
Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control
Engaged
Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In
Reverse
NOTE:
Always adjust the pedals to a position that
allows full movement of the pedal.
Further small adjustments may be necessary
to find the best possible seat/pedal position.
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Settings, you can use your remote keyless
entry key fob or the memory switch on the
driver’s door trim panel to return the adjust-
able pedals to saved positions Ú page 32.
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is
moving. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always adjust the pedals while the
vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable
pedals or impede its ability to move, as it may
cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal
travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable
pedal's path.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned
on or off through the touchscreen.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View
Camera Display — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the
vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed
position at the windshield. The mirror installs on
the windshield button with a counterclockwise
rotation and requires no tools for mounting.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right for various drivers. The mirror should
be adjusted to center on the view through the
rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear, a
video display illuminates to display the image
generated by the rear view camera (for the 3500,
4500, and 5500 Chassis Cab vehicles, the Rear
Backup Camera is shipped loose and not
installed. Please refer to the Ram Body Builders
Guide for more information). The auto dimming
feature is also disabled to improve rear view
viewing.
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped
The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high
definition, wide and unobstructed view of the
road behind while driving.
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, push the
control on the bottom of the mirror forward.
Digital Rearview Mirror
Push the menu button next to the on/off control
to access the following mirror options:
Brightness
Tilt
Use the left and right buttons to scroll through
menu options.
When not in use, pull the on/off control back
toward the steering wheel to return the mirror to
the regular Automatic Dimming Mirror.
NOTE:
The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective
during night time driving in low light applications.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRROR — IF
E
QUIPPED
Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each
sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor
down and swing the mirror cover upward.
The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the
mirror cover turns off the light.
Lift Cover For Illuminated Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor
to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
1 — On/Off Control
2 — Menu Button
3 — Left Scroll Button
4 — Right Scroll Button
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun
blockage.
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the
sun visor is against the windshield for additional
sun blockage through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps
under the outside mirrors, they can be turned
off through the Uconnect system Ú page 228.
DRIVER'S OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC
D
IMMING MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically
adjust for glare from vehicles behind you.
This feature is controlled by the inside
automatic dimming mirror. The mirrors will
automatically adjust for headlight glare when
the inside mirror adjusts.
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The controls for the power mirrors are located
on the driver's door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the
passenger side convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than they really are. Relying
too much on your passenger side convex
mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex
passenger side mirror.
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Right Mirror Selection
3 — Left Mirror Selection
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch.
To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or
R (right) button to select the mirror that you
want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Movement
POWER CONVEX MIRROR SWITCH — IF
E
QUIPPED
The Power Convex Mirror Switch is located on
the door trim panel, above the power mirror
controls. The switch enables the movement
of the convex portion of both the driver and
passenger outside mirrors.
Power Convex Mirror Switch
To adjust the convex portion of the outside
mirrors, push the Power Convex Mirror Switch.
Then, select the mirror you want to adjust by
using the L (left) or R (right) buttons.
To return the control to the large mirror, push
the Power Convex Mirror Switch a second time.
Trailer Tow Power Convex Mirror
NOTE:
If the Power Convex Mirror Switch is not pushed
a second time, the switch will automatically
default back to the larger portion of the outside
mirrors after a period of time.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TRAILER TOWING MIRRORS
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable
mirror head to provide a greater vision range
when towing extra-wide loads. To change
position inboard or outboard, the mirror head
should be rotated (flipped in or out).
Trailer Towing Position
NOTE:
Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to
entering an automated car wash.
A small blindspot mirror is located next to the
main mirror and can be adjusted manually.
Blindspot Mirror
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 58.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE — IF
E
QUIPPED
This feature provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will assist with the driver’s
ground visibility. The outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE.
The outside mirrors will then return to the
original position when the vehicle is shifted out
of REVERSE. If the vehicle is equipped with
Driver Memory Settings, this feature will be
linked to the programmable settings.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 228.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS FOLDING FEATURE
All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be
manually folded both forward and rearward to
prevent damage.
Folding Mirror
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates,
lighting, or home security systems.
The HomeLink® unit is powered by
your vehicles 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in
the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release
any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons.
These buttons will activate the devices they
are programmed to with each press of the
corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located
above the center button.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are
trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the
channels of your HomeLink® before you use it
for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first
time. Do not erase channels when programming
additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine
whether the device has a rolling code or
non-rolling code.
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the
full rearward position to resist damage when
entering a car wash or a narrow location.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date.
Typically, devices manufactured after 1995
have rolling codes. A device with a rolling code
will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the
device. The button may not be immediately
visible when looking at the device. The name
and color of the button may vary slightly by
manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will
not have a rolling code. These devices will also
not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, follow
the steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using
this procedure. You do not need to erase all
channels when programming additional
buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program,
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the garage door opener transmitter button
you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.
Once this happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling
code/non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three
times (holding the button for two seconds
each time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the final
steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final
Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the steps
from the beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink®
to a miscellaneous device follows the same
procedure as programming to a garage door
opener Ú page 48. Be sure to determine if the
device has a rolling code, or non-rolling code
before beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner. The procedure may
need to be performed multiple times to success-
fully pair the device to your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that
has been previously trained, without erasing
all the channels, follow the procedure below.
Be sure to determine whether the new device
you want to program the HomeLink® button to
has a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the HomeLink® Indicator light
begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” Ú page 48, and
follow all remaining steps.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage
or confined area while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous when inhaled and can cause you
and others to be severely injured or killed.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter every
two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal.
The indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or
longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/
device for programming, plug it back in at this
time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps
Ú page 449.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument
panel light dimming, cargo light/trailer spotter
lights (if equipped), and fog lights (if equipped).
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also turned
on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the
headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on
whenever the engine is running, and the low
beams are not on. The lights will remain on until
the ignition is placed in the OFF or ACC position,
or the parking brake is engaged.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect system Ú page 228.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running
Lights may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on
one side of the vehicle (when a turn signal is
activated on that side), or on both sides of
the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights
are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to switch the headlights to
high beam. Pulling the multifunction lever back
toward the steering wheel will turn the low
beams back on.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Push Fog Light Switch
5 — Push Cargo Light Switch
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control through
the use of a camera mounted on the inside
rearview mirror or a windshield mounted
camera. These cameras detect vehicle specific
light and automatically switch from high beams
to low beams until the approaching vehicle is
out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can
be turned on or off by selecting “ON” under “Auto
Dim High Beams” within your Uconnect Settings
Ú
page 228, as well as turning the headlight
switch to the AUTO position.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam
Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the
mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper
performance. See a local authorized dealer.
To opt out of the Advanced Auto High Beam
Sensitivity Control (default) and enter
Reduced High Beam Sensitivity Control (not
recommended), on vehicles equipped with
mirror controlled automatic high beams and
without the forward facing camera, toggle the
high beam lever six full on/off cycles within
10 seconds of placing the ignition in the ON
position. The system will return to the default
setting when the ignition is placed in the OFF
position.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns your headlights
on or off based on ambient light levels. To turn
the system on, rotate the headlight switch to the
AUTO position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place
the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the
automatic headlights off, turn the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the Automatic mode.
DIRECTIONAL LED HEADLAMP
S
YSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This is a system consisting of LED (low/high
beam) headlights that incorporate dynamic
cornering with 5-degree inboard/15-degree
outboard swivel. The headlights continuously and
automatically adapt to the driving conditions
around bends or when cornering based on
steering wheel angle.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
The system directs the headlights to light up the
road in the best way, taking into account the
speed of the vehicle and the bend or corner
angle, as well as the speed of the vehicle while
the steering wheel is being turned.
The adaptive lights are automatically activated
when the vehicle is traveling above approximately
5 mph (8 km/h).
This system can be turned on/off through the
Uconnect Settings under “Steering Directed
Lights” Ú page 228.
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. To turn off the parking lights, rotate
the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS WITH WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
Headlights, it also has this customer-programmable
feature. When your headlights are in the automatic
mode and the engine is running, they will
automatically turn on when the wiper system is on.
This feature is programmable through the Uconnect
system
Ú
page 228.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Rain Sensing
Wiper system
Ú
page 58, and it is activated, the
headlights will automatically turn on after the wipers
complete five wipe cycles within approximately one
minute, and they will turn off approximately four
minutes after the wipers completely stop.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the
daytime, the instrument panel lights will auto-
matically dim to the lower nighttime intensity.
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight
delay feature will leave the headlights on for up to
90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition
is placed in the OFF position while the headlight
switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled
off. Headlight delay can be cancelled by either
turning the headlight switch on then off, or by
placing the ignition in the ON position.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system Ú page 228.
The headlight delay feature is automatically
activated if the headlight switch is left in the
AUTO position when the ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights
are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, a chime will sound and a message will
appear in the instrument cluster display when
the driver’s door is opened.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or low beam headlights and push
in the center of the headlight switch control
knob. Pushing the headlight switch control knob
a second time will turn the front fog lights off.
Front Fog Light Switch
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each
side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash three times then automatically
turn off.
CARGO LIGHTS/TRAILER SPOTTER
L
IGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The cargo lights (if equipped) and trailer spotter
lights (if equipped) are turned on by pushing the
cargo lights button located on the lower half of
the headlight switch.
Cargo Lights Button On Headlight Switch
The cargo lights will turn on for approximately
60 seconds when a key fob unlock button is
pushed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.
When these lights are activated using the
button on the headlight switch, the trailer
spotter lights will remain illuminated when
the vehicle transmission is in PARK, NEUTRAL,
or REVERSE. The trailer spotter lights will turn
off when the vehicle transmission is placed in
DRIVE.
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior
lights to protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
If the ignition is OFF, the interior lights will
automatically turn off when:
Any door is left ajar for 10 minutes.
The Dome Off button is pushed.
The cargo and spotter lights are manually
activated by the headlight switch.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
INTERIOR LIGHTS
COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy, dome, and cargo lights are turned
on when any door is opened or the Dome On
button is pushed on the overhead console. Also,
if your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless
Entry, and the unlock button is pushed on the
key fob, the courtesy, dome, and cargo lights
will turn on.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
The overhead console lights can also be
operated individually as reading lights by
pushing the corresponding buttons.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with an LED overhead
console, if both the Dome On and Dome Off
buttons are pushed, the Illuminated Entry with
door ajar feature will be disabled, but the Dome
Lights inside the vehicle will turn on.
Three types of Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights
are available for your vehicle:
Push button on/off
Push lens on/off
No on/off button, just Courtesy Light
NOTE:
The Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights will remain
on until the switch is pushed a second time, so
be sure they have been turned off before exiting
the vehicle. If the interior lights are left on after
the ignition is turned off, they will automatically
turn off after 10 minutes.
Dimmer Control
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight
switch and are located on the left side of the
instrument panel.
1 — Driver’s Reading Light On/Off Button
2 — Dome Off Button
3 — Dome On Button
4 — Passenger’s Reading Light On/Off Button
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Dimmer Controls
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the right dimmer control upward will increase
the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Rotating the left dimmer control will adjust the
interior and ambient light levels.
NOTE:
The ambient lights are only active when the
headlights or parking lights are on.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
key fob to unlock the doors (if the vehicle is
equipped with remote power door locks) or
open any door.
This feature also turns on the puddle
lamps located beneath the outside mirrors
(if equipped).
The lights will fade to off after approximately
30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off
once the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN
from the OFF position.
The front courtesy overhead console and door
courtesy lights will not turn off if the Dome On
button on the overhead console is pushed.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if
the Dome Off button on the overhead console is
pushed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Illuminated
Approach lights under the outside mirrors, they
will also be turned off by pushing the Dome Off
button.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are
located on the multifunction lever on the left
side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the
end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
1 — Ambient Light Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed
wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward
to the second detent past the intermittent settings
for high-speed wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
Intermittent Wipers
The intermittent feature of this system was
designed for use when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable
pause between cycles, desirable. For maximum
delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
upward to the first detent.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the
knob until it enters the low continual speed
position. The delay can be regulated from a
maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles,
to a cycle every one second. The delay intervals
will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer
knob, located on the end of the multifunction
lever, inward to the second detent. Washer fluid
will be sprayed and the wiper will operate for
two to three cycles after the washer knob is
released from this position.
If the washer knob is depressed while in the
delay range, the wiper will operate for several
seconds after the washer knob is released.
It will then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected. If the washer knob is
pushed while in the off position, the wiper will
turn on and cycle approximately three times
after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
Mist
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or
spray from a passing vehicle is needed, push
the washer knob, located on the end of the
multifunction lever, inward to the first detent
and release. The wipers will cycle one time and
automatically shut off.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 380.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing
of the windshield during freezing weather, warm
the windshield with the defroster before and
during windshield washer use.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the
wipers. Rotate the end of the multifunction
lever to one of five detent positions to activate
this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with
the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is
the least sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is
the most sensitive. Position 3 should be used for
normal rain conditions. Positions 1 and 2 can be
used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity.
Positions 4 and 5 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in
the O (off) position when not using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or sili-
cone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and
off using the Uconnect system
Ú
page 228.
The Rain Sensing system has protection
features for the wiper blades and arms, and will
not operate under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni-
tion is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the
wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside
temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When
the ignition is ON, and the transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch
is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), or the gear selector is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the RUN position, Rain
Sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has
been selected, and no other inhibit condi-
tions (mentioned previously) exist.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction
of air circulating throughout the vehicle.
The controls are located on the touchscreen
(if equipped), on the sides of the touchscreen,
or on the instrument panel below the radio.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display
Automatic Temperature Controls
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch Display Automatic
Temperature Controls
NOTE:
Icons and descriptions can vary based upon
vehicle equipment.
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the
current setting to the coldest output
of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation
to exit. Pressing other settings will also cause
the MAX A/C to exit.
NOTE:
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum
cooling performance.
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate to change the current
setting. The A/C indicator illuminates
when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the system between
Recirculation mode and outside air
mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C
indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button is
pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in
all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button
on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist
that could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually
without disturbing the mode control selection.
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging
may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
recommended.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead
to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
feature may be unavailable if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the windshield.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Auto Button
Set your desired temperature and
press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and
maintain your desired temperature by
automatically adjusting the blower
speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly
recommended for efficiency.
You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen.
Push the button on the faceplate.
Toggling this function will cause the system to
switch between manual mode and automatic
mode Ú page 64.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push and
release the button on the faceplate,
to change the current airflow setting
to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator
illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from
the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. When
toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate
system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push
and release the button on the
faceplate, to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster
is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And
Down Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button (or rotate knob
if equipped) on the faceplate or
touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red
arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button (or rotate knob if
equipped) on the faceplate or
touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display
will only appear if the system is equipped
with an automatic climate control system.
Up and down buttons are only available on
vehicles equipped with a 12-inch display.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator
illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC
synchronizes the passenger temperature setting
with the driver temperature setting. Changing the
passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC
will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of
air forced through the climate control
system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower
will cause automatic mode to switch to manual
operation. The speeds can be selected using
either the blower control knob on the faceplate or
the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the
blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as
you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the
Mode buttons on the touchscreen,
or pushing the Mode button on the
faceplate, to change the airflow
distribution mode. The airflow distribution
mode can be adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets, and demist outlets.
Faceplate
Push the Mode Button to change the airflow
distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode
can be adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets and demist outlets.
Touchscreen
Press one of the “MODE” buttons to change
the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes
from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on
the touchscreen, or push the OFF
button on the faceplate (if equipped)
to turn the Climate Control on/off.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Manual Temperature
Controls
MAX A/C Setting
Set the temperature control knob to
the MAX A/C setting to change the
current setting to the coldest output
of air. Moving the temperature control
knob away from the MAX A/C setting causes the
MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Push the Recirculation button to change
the system between recirculation mode
and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate
when the Recirculation button is pressed.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions,
such as smoke, odors, dust, or humidity are present.
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for
Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode
may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging
may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
recommended.
On vehicles equipped with the Manual Climate
Controls system, the Recirculation mode is not
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled
automatically if this mode is selected.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode causes the LED in the control button to
link, and then turn off.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the mode control knob to the
Front Defrost mode setting. Air comes
from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost
button is selected, the blower level may increase.
Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature
settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost
Control button to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear
Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after
10 minutes.
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature
of the air forced through the climate system.
The temperature increases as you
turn the temperature control knob
clockwise.
The temperature decreases as you
turn the temperature control knob
counterclockwise.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount
of air forced through the climate
control system. There are seven
blower speeds available. The blower
speed increases as you turn the blower control
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the
blower control knob counterclockwise.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob to adjust
airflow distribution. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing
solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE
C
ONTROL (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 228.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands:
“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may only
be used to adjust the interior temperature of your
vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the
heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate
Control system when the vehicle is being stored
for an extended period of time, see
Ú
page 427.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter
the plenum, they could plug the water drains.
In Winter months, make sure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control
to , on, and blower
on high. Roll down the
windows for a minute to
flush out the hot air.
Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve
comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn on and set the
mode control to the
position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in position.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel and
features both an upper and lower storage area.
NOTE:
Not all vehicles are equipped with a door over
the upper storage area.
Glove Compartment
If equipped with a covered upper glove
compartment, push the release button to open.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Door Storage
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas and bottle holders (driver’s side
only) are located in the door trim panels.
Rear Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage compartments are located in both the
driver and passenger rear door trim panels.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to position and
turn on to keep
windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
the position.
If windshield fogging
starts to occur, move the
control to the
position.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
1 — Upper Glove Compartment Release Button
(If Equipped)
2 — Upper Glove Compartment
3 — Lower Glove Compartment
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving
with the glove compartment open may result
in injury in a collision.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
(Continued)
Center Storage Compartment — If
Equipped
The center storage compartment is located between
the driver and passenger seats. The storage
compartment provides an armrest and contains
both an upper and lower storage area.
Center Storage Compartment
Pull the upper handle on the front of the
armrest to raise the cover. The upper storage
area contains a USB port that can be used to
power small electrical devices.
Center Storage Compartment
Upper Storage USB Port
With the upper lid closed, pull the lower handle
to open the lower storage bin. The lower bin
contains a power inverter. There is also a “fill
line” located along the rear inside wall of the
lower bin. Contents above the “fill line” may
interfere with cupholder placement if equipped
with a premium center console.
WARNING!
This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated
on the armrest could be seriously injured
during vehicle operation, or a collision.
In a collision, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about
10 lbs (4.5 kg). These items could be
thrown about endangering occupants of
the vehicle. Items stored should not exceed
a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
1 — Upper Console Handle
2 — Lower Console Handle
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Forward Portion Of Lower Storage Bin
Premium Center Console — If Equipped
The premium center console is equipped with
two front storage bins located in front of the
center storage compartment. These storage
bins may be equipped with tandem doors. Push
the front bin to access the cupholders, or push
the rear bin to access the coin holder/small
storage bin.
Center Console Tandem Doors— If Equipped
Tandem Doors Open Position
1 — Wireless Charging Pad
2 — Power Inverter
3 — Storage Area
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
1 — Push Front Bin Access
2 — Push Rear Bin Access
1 — Front Bin Open
2 — Rear Bin Open
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Push the release button at the front of the
cupholder bin to slide tray rearward to access
the front lower storage bin, or forward to access
the rear lower storage bin.
Push Release Button To Slide Tray
Overhead Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment
is provided for the storage of one pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the door latch to
open the compartment.
Overhead Sunglass Door
The door will slowly rotate to the full open
position.
Front Bench Seat Storage — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench
seat, storage can be found by folding down the
center seat back. A console storage area and
cupholders are available. With the seatback in
the upright position, lifting the seat bottom also
reveals a storage location.
Front Bench Seat Storage Location
If equipped, there is a storage drawer located in
the lower center of the instrument panel. It can
be released by pushing the access button above
it. Pull drawer outward to the fully open position.
Storage Drawer Access Button
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Seatback Storage — If Equipped
Located in the back of both the driver and
passenger front seats are pockets that can be
used for storage.
Driver’s Side Seatback Storage
Storage Bin (Regular Cab)
The storage bin is located behind the front
seats and runs the length of the cab.
Storage Bin
Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped
Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat may
be equipped with a folding load floor.
Unfolding The Load Floor/Crew Cab
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the
upward position.
Load Floor Legs In Stowed Position
2. Unfold both the legs using the straps.
Load Floor Legs In Opened Position
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items
stored on the load floor. While driving or in an
accident you may experience abrupt stopping,
rapid acceleration, or sharp turns. Loose
objects stored on the load floor may move
around with force and strike occupants,
resulting in serious or fatal injury.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
3. Lift the front panel until the load floor
unfolds into position.
Load Floor In Open Position
4. Reverse the procedure to store the load
floor.
Positioning The Load Floor For Storage Access
Under The Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the
upward position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either
side of the load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage
under the load floor.
Load Floor Securing Straps/Crew Cab
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor
back in the secured down position before
you operate the vehicle.
Below Rear Seat Storage (Crew Cab)
The Crew Cab models provide additional
storage under the rear seats. Lift the seats to
access the storage compartment.
To open the storage compartments, unsnap the
securing snap located at either side of the load
floor and lift upward on the fold flat lid.
Crew Cab Storage
NOTE:
For more information on storage and the fold
flat floor, refer to “Fold Flat Load Floor” in the
previous section.
WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up
position. When stopping fast or in an
accident, the load floor could move to the
down position causing serious injury.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
USB/AUX C ONTROL
Located on the center stack, just below the
instrument panel, is the main media hub. There
are four total USB ports: Two Mini-USBs (Type C)
and two Standard USBs (Type A). There is also
an AUX port located in the middle of the USB
Ports.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port
may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information,
refer to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in
the Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same
time, and both ports will provide charging capa-
bilities. Only one port can transfer data to the
system at a time. A pop-up will appear and allow
you to select the device transferring data.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type
A USB port and another device is plugged into
the Type C USB port, a message will appear and
allow you to select which device to use.
Center Stack USB/AUX Media Hub
Rear USB Ports
Third and fourth USB ports are located behind
the center console, above the power inverter.
One of these USBs ports is charge only.
Applicable to only Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With
8.4-inch Display, and Uconnect 4C NAV With
12-inch Display radios, different scenarios are
listed below when a non-phone device is
plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports,
and when a phone device is plugged into the
smaller and larger USB ports:
“A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“Another device is in use through the same
USB port. Please disconnect the first device
to use the second device”.
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to be
lost.
If equipped, your vehicle may also contain a
USB port located on the top tray of the vehicles
center console.
1 — USB Port #1
2 — AUX Port
3 — USB Port #2
1 — Rear Media USB Ports
2 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
(Continued)
If equipped, two Mini-USB Ports (Type C), two
Standard USB Ports (Type A), and one AUX port
may be located to the left of the center stack,
just below the climate controls.
Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub
Some USB ports support media and charging.
You can use features, such as Apple CarPlay®,
Android Auto™, Pandora®, and others while
charging your phone.
NOTE:
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to be lost.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or visit
UconnectPhone.com.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet can
provide power for in-cab accessories designed
for use with the standard “cigarette lighter”
style plug. The 12 Volt power outlets and 5 Volt
(2.5 Amp) USB port (Charge Only) have a cap
attached to the outlet indicating “12V DC”,
together with either a key symbol, battery
symbol, or USB symbol.
A key symbol indicates that the ignition must be
in the ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to
provide power. The battery symbol indicates
that the outlet is connected to the battery, and
can provide power at all times.
An auxiliary power outlet can be found in the
tray on top of the center stack. This power outlet
works when the ignition is in the ON/RUN, ACC,
or OFF position.
Power Outlet — Top Of Center Stack
1 — Standard USB Type A Ports
2 — Mini-USB Type C Ports
3 — AUX Port
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watts (13 Amps) power rating is
exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Outlet Fuse Locations:
F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow UCI Port/ USB Rear
Center Console
F90 Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel
Power Outlet Battery Fed (If Equipped)
F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel
Power Outlet Ignition Fed (If Equipped)
F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter/ Instru-
ment Panel Power Outlet (If Equipped)
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug any
equipment as to not drain the battery of the vehicle.
All accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be
removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use
to protect the battery against discharge.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, a 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum)
inverter may be located inside the center console
towards the right hand side, just under the
Wireless Charging Pad (if equipped). This inverter
can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up
to 400 Watts. Certain high-end video game
consoles exceed this power limit, as will most
power tools.
Center Console Power Inverter Outlet
There is also a second 115 Volt (400 Watts
Maximum) power inverter located on the rear of
the center console. This inverter can power
cellular phones, electronics and other low
power devices requiring power up to 400 Watts.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power
(i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.),
will discharge the battery even more
quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Certain high-end video game consoles exceed
this power limit, as will most power tools.
All power inverters are designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of 400 Watts
is exceeded, the power inverter shuts down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the
outlet the inverter should reset.
Rear Center Console Power Inverter Outlet
NOTE:
400 Watts is the maximum for the inverter, not each
outlet. If three outlets are in use, 400 Watts is
shared amongst the devices plugged in.
If equipped, there may be a 115 Volt (400 Watts
Maximum) inverter located to the right of the
center stack, just below the climate controls.
This inverter can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices
requiring power up to 400 Watts. Certain
high-end video game consoles exceed this
power limit, as will most power tools.
Center Stack Power Inverter
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the
device. The outlet turns off when the device is
unplugged.
NOTE:
The power inverter only turns on if the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter shuts down if the power rating is
exceeded.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — IF
E
QUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi
wireless charging pad located inside of the center
console. This charging pad is designed to
wirelessly charge your Qi enabled mobile phone.
Qi is a standard that uses magnetic induction to
transfer power to your mobile device.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi
wireless charging. If the phone is not equipped
with Qi wireless charging functionality, an
aftermarket sleeve or a specialized back plate
can be purchased from your mobile phone
provider or a local electronics retailer. Please
see your phone’s owner’s manual for further
information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an
anti-slip mat, an adjustable cradle to hold your
mobile phone in place and an LED indicator light.
NOTE:
Using a phone case may interfere with wireless
charging.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
The window controls on the driver's door control
all the door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be
operated by using the single window controls
on the passenger door trim panel. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position.
To open the window part way (manually), push
the window switch down briefly and release.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the
charging pad or within 15 cm (150 mm) of it.
Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup
and damage to the fob. Placing the fob in
close proximity of the charging pad blocks the
fob from being detected by the vehicle and
prevents the vehicle from starting.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The timing is program-
mable within Uconnect Settings Ú page 228.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES — IF
E
QUIPPED
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power
window switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down for a short period
of time, then release, and the window will go
down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up for a short period
of time and release; the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then
go back down. Remove the obstacle and use
the window switch again to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the
switch lightly and hold to close the window
manually.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the switch up for an additional two seconds
after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
the window completely and continue to hold
the switch down for an additional two
seconds after the window is fully open.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped
by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH — IF
E
QUIPPED
The window lockout switch on the driver's door
trim panel allows you to disable the window
controls on the rear passenger doors. To disable
the window controls, push and release the
window lockout button (the indicator light on
the button will turn on). To enable the window
controls, push and release the window lockout
button again (the indicator light on the button will
turn off).
Window Lockout Switch
POWER SLIDING REAR WINDOW — IF
E
QUIPPED
The switch for the power sliding rear window
is located on the overhead console. Push the
switch rearward to open the glass. Pull the
switch forward to close the glass.
Power Sliding Rear Window Switch
MANUAL SLIDING REAR WINDOW — IF
E
QUIPPED
A locking device in the center of the window
helps to prevent entry from the rear of the
vehicle. Squeeze the lock to release the
window.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a
normal occurrence and can be minimized.
If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows
open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
HOOD
TO OPEN THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be
released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below
the steering wheel at the base of the
instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center
of the hood and push the safety latch lever
to the left to release it, before raising the
hood.
Safety Latch Location
TO CLOSE THE HOOD
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from
the point where the props no longer hold the
hood open.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at
the front center of the hood to ensure that
both latches engage.
2
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster — Gasoline
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Voltmeter
When the vehicle is in the RUN state, the
gauge indicates the electrical system
voltage. The pointer should stay within
the normal range if the battery is
charged. If the pointer moves to either
extreme left or right and remains there
during normal driving, the electrical
system should be serviced.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 90.
Base Instrument Cluster Display
The display always shows one of the main
menu item after ignition on.
4. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate the
oil pressure when the engine is running.
A continuous high or low reading under
normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Imme-
diate service should be obtained from an
authorized dealer.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
3
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Temperature Gauge
The gauge pointer shows engine coolant
temperature. The pointer positioned
within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, or when
towing a trailer. It should not be allowed
to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
7. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in
the fuel tank when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. It is recommended to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats. If you decide to look under the hood
yourself, Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph
Ú
page 383.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off
until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on the “H,” turn
the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE
Premium Instrument Cluster — Gasoline
3
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 90.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
The display always shows one of the main
menu item after ignition on.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The gauge pointer shows engine coolant
temperature. The pointer positioned
within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, or when
towing a trailer. It should not be allowed
to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in
the fuel tank when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, Follow the
warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap
paragraph
Ú
page 383.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL
Base / Midline Diesel Instrument Cluster — Diesel
3
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DIESEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Engine Coolant Temperature
This gauge shows the engine coolant
temperature. The gauge pointer will likely
show higher temperatures when driving
in hot weather, up mountain grades, or in
heavy stop and go traffic. If the red
Warning Light turns on while driving,
safely bring the vehicle to a stop, and
turn off the engine. DO NOT operate the
vehicle until the cause is corrected.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 90.
Base Instrument Cluster Display
The display always shows one of the main
menu item after ignition on.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. It is recommended to call
an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads greater “H,” pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner
turned off until the pointer drops back into the
normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“h,” turn the engine off immediately and call
an authorized dealer for service.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
4. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate some
oil pressure when the engine is running.
A continuous high or low reading under
normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Imme-
diate service should be obtained from an
authorized dealer.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of
Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF
is required to maintain normal vehicle
operation and emissions compliance. If
something is wrong with the gauge, a DEF
Warning Message or Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) will be displayed. More informa-
tion is available in the instrument cluster
display section under the heading of DEF
Warning Messages.
7. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel filler door is located.
NOTE:
The gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of DEF
to the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to
the DEF system, the gauge may not update to
the new level. See an authorized dealer for
service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank
heater will possibly warm up the DEF fluid
and allow the gauge to update after a period
of run time. Under very cold conditions, it is
possible that the gauge may not reflect the
new fill level for several drives.
3
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL
Premium Instrument Cluster — Diesel
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
DIESEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 90.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
The display always shows one of the main
menu item after ignition on.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
The DEF Gauge displays the actual level
of Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank.
DEF is required to maintain normal
vehicle operation and emissions compli-
ance. If something is wrong with the
gauge, a DEF Warning Message or
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) will be
displayed. More information is available
in the instrument cluster display section
under the heading of Diesel Exhaust
Fluid (DEF) Warning Messages.
5. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel filler door is located.
NOTE:
The DEF tank on these vehicles is designed
with a large amount of full reserve. So the
level sensor will indicate a full reading even
before the tank is completely full. To put it
another way, there’s additional storage
capacity in the tank above the Full mark
that’s not represented in the gauge. You may
not see any movement in the reading – even
after driving up to 200 miles (321 kilome-
ters) in some cases.
The gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of DEF
to the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to
the DEF system, the gauge may not update to
the new level. See an authorized dealer for
service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank
heater will possibly warm up the DEF fluid
and allow the gauge to update after a period
of run time. Under very cold conditions, it is
possible that the gauge may not reflect the
new fill level for several drives.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
3
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information to
the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
opening/closing of a door will activate the display
for viewing, and display the total miles, or
kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and
features. Using a driver interactive display
located on the instrument panel, your instrument
cluster display can show you how systems are
working and give you warnings when they are not.
The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to
scroll through the main menus and submenus.
You can access the specific information you want
and make selections and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
C
ONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
Base Instrument Cluster Display
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display menu items may
consist of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Off-Road — If Equipped
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip Info
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
Trailer Tow
Audio
Messages
Screen Set Up
Vehicle Settings — If Equipped
Commercial Settings — If Equipped
The system allows the driver to select
information by pushing the following instrument
cluster display control buttons located on the
left side of the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to
scroll upward through the main menu items,
submenu screen, and vehicle settings.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button
to scroll downward through the main menu
items, submenu screen, and vehicle settings.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to
access/select the information screens or
submenu screens of a main menu item.
Push and hold the right arrow button for
two seconds to reset displayed/selected
features that can be reset.
Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button
to access/select the information screens,
submenu screens of a main menu item, or to
return to the main menu.
OIL LIFE RESET
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the instrument
cluster display after a single chime has sounded,
to indicate the next scheduled oil change
interval. The engine oil change indicator system
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
your personal driving style.
NOTE:
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster
display controls for the following procedure.
Oil Life Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button
to scroll downward through the main menu
to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button
to access the ”Vehicle Info” screen, then
scroll up or down to select “Oil Life.”
3
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to
select “Reset”.
5. Push and release the down arrow button
to select “Yes,” then push and release the
right arrow button to reset the Oil Life to
100%.
6. Push and release the up arrow button to
exit the instrument cluster display screen.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return
the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when
you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the desired selectable menu icon is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the speedometer menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the right arrow button to
cycle the display between mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Vehicle Info menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the right arrow button to
enter the submenus items of Vehicle Info.
Follow the directional prompts to access or
reset any of the following Vehicle Info submenu
items:
Tire Pressure
Coolant Temperature
Transmission Temperature — If Equipped
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure
Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
Boost Pressure — If Equipped
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) — If Equipped
Oil Life
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Battery Voltage
Gauge Summary
Engine Hours
Off-Road
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Off-Road menu icon is displayed
in the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the left or right arrow button to
scroll through the information submenus.
Drivetrain
Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical
and numerical value of calculated
average front wheel angle from the
steering wheel orientation.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
Transfer Case Lock Status: displays
“Lock” graphic only during 4WD High,
4WD High Part Time, 4WD Low status.
Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If Equipped):
displays front and rear or rear only axle
locker graphic, and sway bar connection
graphic with text message (connected or
disconnected).
Pitch And Roll
Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle
in the graphic with the angle number on
the screen.
NOTE:
When vehicle speed becomes too high to
display the pitch and roll, “- -” will display in
place of the numbers, and the graphic will be
greyed out. A message indicating the necessary
speed for the feature to become available will
also display.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of
the ACC system.
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Driver Assist menu is displayed
in the instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature
The instrument cluster display displays the
current ACC system settings. The information
displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the ACC on/off button (located on the
steering wheel) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on
the steering wheel) and the following will display
in the instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in
the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity Ú page 166.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays
the current LaneSense system settings.
The information displayed depends on
LaneSense system status and the conditions
that need to be met Ú page 183.
3
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and Hold the right arrow button to reset
Average Fuel Economy.
Current Fuel Economy Gauge
Average Fuel Economy Value
Range To Empty
Fuel Tank Levels — If Equipped
Trip A/Trip B
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip menu item is highlighted
in the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the right arrow button to enter the
submenus of Trip A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip
B information will display the following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Push and hold right arrow button to reset all
information.
Trailer Tow
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trailer Tow menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the right or left arrow
button to cycle through the following trailer tow
information:
Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold
the OK button to reset the distance.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM):
Braking Output
Trailer Type
ITBM Gain
Trailer Light Check: Push and hold the
OK button to begin the Trailer Light Test
sequence Ú page 209.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring: The Instru-
ment Cluster Display will display the Trailer
Tire Pressure for a connected trailer with
sensors that match the active trailer profile.
When a low tire is present, the low tire value
will be displayed in red, and the affected low
tire will have a red glow. “Trailer Tire Low“ will
be displayed on the center bottom of the
Instrument Cluster Display screen.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
This menu will display the audio source
information, including the Song name, Artist
name, and audio source with an accompanying
graphic.
Phone Call Status
When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status
pop-up will display on the screen. The pop-up
will remain until the phone is answered or
ignored.
NOTE:
The call status will temporarily replace the
previous media source information displayed
on the screen. When the pop-up is no longer
displayed, the display will return to the last used
screen.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Messages Menu item is
highlighted. This feature shows the number of
stored warning messages. Push and release the
right or left arrow button to cycle through
stored messages.
Screen Setup Menu Item
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the right arrow button to
enter the Screen Setup submenu. The Screen
Setup feature allows you to change what
information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information
is displayed.
Current Gear — If Equipped
Off
On
Odometer
Unit Without Decimal
Unit With Decimal
Favorite Menu
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist (Show/Hide) — If Equipped
Fuel Economy (Show/Hide)
Trip Info (Show/Hide)
Trailer Tow (Show/Hide)
Audio (Show/Hide)
Messages
Screen Setup
Vehicle Settings — If Equipped
Commercial Settings — If Equipped
NOTE:
Menus with (Show/Hide) can push the right
arrow button to choose whether to show or hide
this menu in the instrument cluster display.
Upper Left — If Equipped
None
Compass — If Equipped
Outside Temp — If Equipped
Time
Range To Empty
Average Econ
Current Econ
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip — If Equipped
Trailer Brake — If Equipped
Oil Pressure — If Equipped
Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
Oil Temperature — If Equipped
Battery Voltage — If Equipped
Transmission Temperature — If Equipped
3
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Life — If Equipped
Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
Turbo Boost — If Equipped
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Center
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average Econ
Current Econ
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip — If Equipped
Audio
Speedometer
Menu Title
Upper Right
None
Compass — If Equipped
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average Econ
Current Econ
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip — If Equipped
Trailer Brake — If Equipped
Oil Pressure — If Equipped
Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
Oil Temperature — If Equipped
Battery Voltage — If Equipped
Transmission Temperature — If Equipped
Oil Life — If Equipped
Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
Turbo Boost — If Equipped
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Left Side — If Equipped
None
Range
Average Econ
Menu Icon
Coolant Temperature
Oil Temperature
Transmission Temperature
Oil Life
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
Right Side — If Equipped
None
Range
Average Econ
Menu Icon
Coolant Temperature
Oil Temperature
Transmission Temperature
Oil Life
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Lower Left — If Equipped
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average Econ
Current Econ
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip
Trailer Brake
Oil Pressure
Coolant Temperature
Oil Temperature
Battery Voltage
Transmission Temperature
Oil Life
Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
Turbo Boost — If Equipped
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Lower Right — If Equipped
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average Econ
Current Econ
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip
Trailer Brake
Oil Pressure
Coolant Temperature
Oil Temperature
Battery Voltage
Transmission Temperature
Oil Life
Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
Turbo Boost — If Equipped
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Restore Defaults
Cancel
Restore
3
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Settings — If Equipped
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and
recall features when the transmission is in
PARK.
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until Settings displays in the instrument
cluster display.
Follow the prompts to display and set any of the
following Vehicle Settings.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following
settings.
If equipped with a base radio (Non-Touch-
screen) Vehicle Settings will be included in
the instrument cluster display.
If equipped with a Touchscreen radio, the
Vehicle Settings will be included in the radio
head unit.
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)
Language Select Language English, Spanish, French, Arabic
Units Units U.S.; Metric
ParkSense ParkSense
Front Volume — Low; Medium; High
Rear Volume — Low; Medium; High
Tilt Mirror in Reverse Tilt Mirror in R On; Off
Rain Sensing Wipers Auto Wipers On; Off
Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist On; Off
Headlights Off Delay Lights Off Delay 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
Illuminated Approach Lights w/ Unlock 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
Headlights On with Wipers Lights w/ Wipers On; Off
Automatic High beams Auto High beams On; Off
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
Daytime Running Lights Daytime Lights On; Off
Flash Lights with Lock Lights w/ Lock On; Off
Auto Lock Doors Auto Lock Doors On; Off
Auto Unlock Doors Auto Unlock Doors On; Off
Sound Horn with Remote Start Horn w/ Rmt Start On; Off
Sound Horn with Remote Lock Horn w/ Rmt Lock Off; 1st Press; 2nd Press
Remote Unlock Sequence Remote Unlock Driver Door; All Doors
Key Fob Linked to Memory Key in Memory On; Off
Passive Entry Passive Entry On; Off
Remote Start Comfort System Rmt Start Comfort Off; Remote Start; All starts
Easy Exit Seat Easy Exit Seat On; Off
Key-off Power Delay Power Off Delay Off; 45 seconds; 5 minutes; 10 minutes
Commercial Settings Commercial
Aux Switches
Power Take-Off
PIN Setup
NOTE:
If the vehicle’s PIN is forgotten or not known, see an authorized dealer to have
the PIN reset.
Trailer Select Trailer Select Trailer 1; Trailer 2; Trailer 3; Trailer 4
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)
3
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Type Brake Type Light Electric; Heavy Electric; Light EOH; Heavy EOH
Trailer Name Trailer Name
Trailer # (# is equal to slot position)
Boat
Car
Cargo
Dump
Equipment
Flatbed
Gooseneck
Horse
Livestock
Motorcycle
Snowmobile
Travel
Utility
5th Wheel
Compass Variance Compass Var 1-15 increments of 1
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
Commercial Settings — If Equipped
Commercial Settings allows the driver to set
and recall additional features when the
transmission is in PARK.
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until Commercial Settings displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Follow the prompts to enter the required PIN
and enter the Commercial Settings submenu.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen
radio, “Commercial Settings” will replace
“Vehicle Settings” in the instrument cluster
display. The Commercial Settings menu will only
include the settings below Ú page 228.
Commercial Settings allows you to access the
following features (if equipped):
Power Take Off (PTO)
Remote Ignition
Idle Control
Backup Alarm
ParkSense
Aux Switches
PIN Setup
NOTE:
If the vehicle’s PIN is forgotten or not known,
see an authorized dealer to have the PIN reset.
DIESEL MESSAGES AND WARNINGS
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Messages
The Cummins diesel engine meets all diesel
emissions standards, resulting in one of the
lowest emitting diesel engines ever produced.
To achieve these emissions standards, your
vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art
engine and exhaust system. These systems are
seamlessly integrated into your vehicle and
managed by the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM). The PCM manages engine combustion
to allow the exhaust system’s catalyst to trap
and burn Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants,
with no input or interaction on your part.
Calibrate Compass Compass Cal Cancel; Calibrate
Fuel Saver Display Fuel Saver On; Off
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)
3
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to
additional maintenance required on your
vehicle or engine. The following messages may
display in your instrument cluster display:
Perform Service — Your vehicle will require
emissions maintenance at a set interval.
To help remind you when this maintenance
is due, the instrument cluster display will
display “Perform Service”. When the “Perform
Service” message is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display it is necessary to have the
emissions maintenance performed. Emissions
maintenance may include replacing the
Closed Crankcase Ventilation (CCV) filter
element. The procedure for clearing and reset-
ting the "Perform Service" indicator message is
located in the appropriate Service Information.
Exhaust System — Regeneration Required
Now — "Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at
Highway Speeds to Remedy" will be displayed
in the instrument cluster display if the exhaust
particulate filter reaches 80% of its maximum
storage capacity. Under conditions of exclu-
sive short duration and low speed driving
cycles, your Cummins diesel engine and
exhaust after-treatment system may never
reach the conditions required to remove the
trapped PM. If this occurs, the “Exhaust Filter
XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway Speeds to
Remedy” message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display. If this message is
displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in
alerting you of this condition
By simply driving your vehicle at highway
speeds for as little as 45 minutes, you can
remedy the condition in the particulate filter
system and allow your Cummins diesel
engine and exhaust after-treatment system
to remove the trapped PM and restore the
system to normal operating condition.
Exhaust System — Regeneration In Process
Exhaust Filter XX% Full — Indicates that the
DPF is self-cleaning. Maintain your current
driving condition until regeneration is
completed.
Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed —
This message indicates that the DPF
self-cleaning is completed. If this message is
displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in
alerting you of this condition.
Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer
Now — This message indicates regeneration
has been disabled due to a system malfunc-
tion. At this point the engine Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) will register a fault code,
the instrument panel will display a MIL light.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do not
park or operate your vehicle in areas where
your exhaust system can contact anything
that can burn.
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to
the exhaust system could occur soon with
continued operation.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See
Dealer — This message indicates the PCM
has derated the engine to limit the likelihood
of permanent damage to the after-treatment
system. If this condition is not corrected and
a dealer service is not performed, extensive
exhaust after-treatment damage can occur.
To correct this condition it will be necessary
to have your vehicle serviced by an autho-
rized dealer.
NOTE:
Failing to follow the oil change indicator,
changing your oil and resetting the oil change
indicator by 0 miles remaining will prevent
the diesel exhaust filter from performing it's
cleaning routine. This will shortly result in a
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) and reduced
engine power. Only an authorized dealer will be
able to correct this condition.
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Messages
The vehicle will display messages when a
derate (engine power reduction) is activated
to protect the engine during start up in cold
ambient temperatures.
Engine Power Reduced During Warm up —
This message will display during start up
when the ambient temperature is between
10°F (-12°C) and -10°F (-23°C).
Engine Power Reduced Up To 30 Sec
(Seconds) During Warm up — This message
will display during start up when the ambient
temperature is between -10°F (-23°C) and
-25°F (-32°C).
Engine Power Reduced Up To 2 Min
(Minutes) During Warm up — This message
will display during start up when the ambient
temperature is -25°F (-32°C) and below.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine
warm up protection feature that may limit
engine performance after cold starting at low
ambient temperatures. The length of time
engine speed is limited is dependent upon
engine coolant temperature. Engine speed
may be briefly limited to 1,000 RPM after
starting with coolant temperature below
freezing conditions, and may be limited to
1,000 RPM for up to approximately two
minutes under more severe cold conditions.
Coolant Low — This telltale will turn on to indi-
cate the vehicle coolant level is low. Refer to
“Dealer Service” in “Servicing And Mainte-
nance” for more information.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning
Messages
There are four different messages which are
displayed if the vehicle detects that the DEF
system has been filled with a fluid other than
DEF, has experienced component failures, or
when tampering has been detected. The vehicle
may be limited to a maximum speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h) if the DEF system is not serviced
within less than 200 miles (322 km) of the fault
being detected.
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the
following warnings will display:
DEF Low Refill Soon — This message will
display when the low level is reached, during
vehicle start up, and with increased frequency
during vehicle operation. It will be accompa-
nied by a single chime. Approximately
5 gallons (19 Liters) of DEF is required to
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to
the exhaust system could occur soon with
continued operation.
3
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
refill the tank when this message is initially
displayed on pickup applications, and approxi-
mately 7 gallons (26 Liters) are required on
chassis-cab applications.
Speed Limited to 5 MPH in XXX mi Refill DEF —
This message will continuously display if the
“DEF Low Refill Soon” message is ignored, and
the frequency of occurrence of the chime will
increase unless up to 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) of
DEF is added to the tank.
5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or
Refuel Refill DEF — This message will continu-
ously display when the counter reaches zero,
and will be accompanied by a periodic chime.
The vehicle will only be capable of a
maximum speed of 5 mph upon the first of
the following conditions to occur:
If the vehicle is shutoff and restarted.
If the vehicle is idled for an extended period
of time, approximately one hour or greater.
If the system detects that the level of fuel
in the tank has increased.
Add a minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) of DEF
to the tank in order to avoid vehicle operation
at a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
NOTE:
A minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) may be
required to restore normal vehicle operation.
Although the vehicle will start normally and can
be placed in gear after this message has been
initially displayed, extreme caution should be
utilized since the vehicle will only be capable of
maneuvering at a maximum speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h).
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault Warning
Messages
There are five different messages which are
displayed if the vehicle detects that the DEF
system has been filled with a fluid other than
DEF, has experienced component failures, or
when tampering has been detected. The vehicle
may be limited to a maximum speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h) if the DEF system is not serviced
within less than 200 miles (322 km) of the fault
being detected.
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the
following warnings will display:
Service DEF System See Dealer — This
message will display when the fault is initially
detected, each time the vehicle is started,
and periodically during driving. The message
will be accompanied by a single chime. We
recommend you drive to the nearest autho-
rized dealer and have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible.
5 MPH Max Speed in 150 mi Service DEF
System See Dealer — This message will display
if the DEF system has not been serviced after
the “Service DEF System – See Dealer”
message is displayed. This message will
continuously display until the mileage counter
reaches zero, and will be accompanied by a
periodic chime. The message will continue to
countdown until it reaches zero unless the
vehicle is serviced. We recommend you drive
to your nearest authorized dealer and have
your vehicle serviced immediately.
NOTE:
Under some circumstances this mileage
counter may start with a value of less than
150 miles (241 km). For example, if recurring
faults are detected in a time interval of less
than 40 hours, the counter may restart at the
value where it stopped when a previous fault
was temporarily remedied, or at a minimum of
50 miles (80 km).
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle
or Refuel Service DEF See Dealer — This
message will continuously display when the
mileage counter reaches zero, and will be
accompanied by a periodic chime.
The vehicle will only be capable of a
maximum speed of 5 mph upon the first of
the following conditions to occur:
If the vehicle is shutoff and restarted.
If the vehicle is idled for an extended
period of time, approximately one hour
or greater.
If the system detects that the level of fuel
in the tank has increased.
5 MPH Max Speed Service DEF System See
Dealer — This message will continuously
display, and will be accompanied by a peri-
odic chime. Although the vehicle can be
started and placed in gear, the vehicle will
only operate at a maximum speed of 5 mph.
Your vehicle will require towing, see an
authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
When this message is displayed, the engine can
still be started. However, the vehicle will only
operate at a maximum speed of 5 mph.
Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer — This
message will display when the fault is initially
detected, each time the vehicle is started,
and periodically during driving. The message
will be accompanied by a single chime.
We recommend you drive to the nearest
authorized dealer and have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
RAM Active Air System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Ram Active Air system that provides enhanced
performance, especially when towing under
demanding hot or high altitude conditions. If the
instrument cluster display displays the message
“Active Airbox Service Required See Dealer”, vehicle
performance may be reduced until service is
performed by an authorized RAM dealer.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
monitoring of the electrical system and status
of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions
will take place to extend the driving time and
distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On Some Systems May Have
Reduced Power” will appear in the instrument
cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
3
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system Ú page 108.
The electrical loads that may be switched off
(if equipped), and vehicle functions which can
be affected by load reduction:
Heated Seats/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volt AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because
the electrical loads are larger than the capa-
bility of charging system. The charging system
is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior
and interior lights, overloaded power outlets
+12 Volts, 115 Volt AC, USB ports) during
certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles
and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior).
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volt AC, USB ports.
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature).
Check the audio settings (volume).
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips
and the evaluation of the vehicle and driving
pattern did not help to identify the cause.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a
failure indication. All active telltales will display
first if applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment options
and current vehicle status. Some telltales are
optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when
the driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat
belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound
Ú
page 292.
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is not on during startup, stays on,
or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application.
If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir,
it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light
will remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
3
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two seconds.
The light should then turn off unless the parking
brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the
light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the hood is ajar/open and not fully
closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle
is disarmed.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and
a single chime will sound. If the temperature
reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will
sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning
(A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle.
If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call
for service Ú page 346.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly.
If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction
with the charging system. Contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer.
A chime will sound when this light turns on.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC
system. If a problem is detected while
the vehicle is running, the light will
either stay on or flash depending on the nature
of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and
the transmission is placed in the PARK position.
The light should turn off. If the light remains
on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the EPS system
Ú page 163.
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the Trailer Brake has been
disconnected Ú page 200.
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the
light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
3
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single
chime.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the ACC system.
Contact a local authorized dealer for
service Ú page 166.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position before engine start.
If the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc.
This could result in death or serious injury to
the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the ESC system is Active. The ESC
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and when ESC is activated. It should go
out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in
the ESC system. If this warning light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle
has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is
off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low
Ú page 364.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 3.2 gal (12 L) this light
will turn on, and remain on until fuel is
added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel
Warning.
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate
the vehicle coolant level is low
Ú page 367.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly
close the filler cap to disengage the
light. If the light does not turn off,
please see an authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light — If Equipped
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
3
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised.
Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment that
is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to have your sensor function checked.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required
as soon as possible. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
have the brake system inspected by an authorized
dealer.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward Collision
Warning System. Contact an authorized
dealer for service
Ú
page 281.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
signal a fault with the 4WD system.
If the light stays on or comes on
during driving, it means that the 4WD
system is not functioning properly and that
service is required. We recommend you drive to
the nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Cruise Control System is
not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to
indicate that Forward Collision
Warning is off Ú page 281.
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when TOW/HAUL mode is selected.
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate when Trailer Merge Assist
has been activated.
Cargo Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cargo light is activated by
pushing the cargo light button on the
headlight switch.
Snowplow Mode Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when Snowplow Mode has been
activated Ú page 212.
3
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when a derate (engine power
reduction) is activated for protection
of the turbocharger in cold ambient
temperatures.
Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Diesel Exhaust Brake has
been activated, and is in full strength
mode Ú page 138.
4WD Lock Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the 4WD LOCK mode.
The front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed Ú page 153.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the 4WD Low mode.
The front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels Ú page 153.
4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the 4WD High mode.
The front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
4WD power transfer case is in the
NEUTRAL mode and the front and rear
driveshafts are disengaged from the
powertrain.
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
The Low DEF Indicator will illuminate if
the vehicle is low on DEF
Ú
page 379.
Wait To Start Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate for
approximately two seconds when the
ignition is turned to the RUN position.
Its duration may be longer based on
colder operating conditions. Vehicle will not
initiate start until telltale is no longer displayed
Ú page 122.
NOTE:
The “Wait To Start” telltale may not illuminate if the
intake manifold temperature is warm enough.
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “Water In Fuel Indicator Light”
will illuminate when there is water
detected in the fuel filter. If this light
remains on, DO NOT start the vehicle
before you drain the water from the fuel filter to
prevent engine damage Ú page 375.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set
and a the vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 166.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
No Target Detected Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when the
Adaptive Cruise Control is SET and
there is no vehicle in front detected
Ú page 166.
Automatic Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Diesel Exhaust Brake has
been activated, and has switched to
Automatic mode Ú page 164.
ECO Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ECO Mode
is active.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator
will flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
If equipped with fog lamps, the fog lamp on
the side of the activated turn signal will also
illuminate to provide additional light when
turning.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is set to the
desired speed Ú page 164.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the
vehicle equipped with ACC has been
turned on but not set Ú page 166.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is ready, but
not set Ú page 164.
Set Speed Display
The Set Speed Display indicator light
indicates the set speed for the Speed
Control and ACC settings.
3
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
to indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II.
This system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may
need to access this information to assist with
the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 220.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch
to the ON position, you will see the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the
I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
3
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE
ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belt.
The starter should not be operated for more
than 10-second intervals. Waiting a few
seconds between such intervals will protect the
starter from overheating.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the engine with the transmission in the
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting
into any driving range.
NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal
must be pressed to shift out of PARK.
If equipped with an eight-speed transmis-
sion, starting the vehicle in NEUTRAL is not
possible unless the Manual Park Release has
been activated. For the Manual Park Release
operation information Ú page 348.
TIP START FEATURE
Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition
switch briefly to the START position and release
it. The starter motor will continue to run and will
automatically disengage when the engine is
running.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long
as the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go key
fob is in the passenger compartment.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous
for a number of reasons. A child or others could
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE
START/STOP B
UTTON
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds or three short pushes in a
row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition will remain in the ACC mode
until the gear selector is in PARK and the
button is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h),
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the
PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h),
the engine will shut off and the ignition will
remain in the ACC position. If vehicle speed
drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the vehicle
may AutoPark Ú page 120.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:
OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition
modes without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to place the ignition to the ACC mode.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the
RUN mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
third time to return the ignition to the OFF
mode.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
AUTOPARK — ROTARY SHIFTER AND
E
IGHT SPEED TRANSMISSION ONLY
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations
on the following pages occur. It is a back up
system and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts the
vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will
engage are outlined on the following pages.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and
an eight speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC mode. After 30 minutes the igni-
tion switches to OFF automatically, unless the
driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and
an eight speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the
“AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear”
to not be seen. In these cases, the shifter must
be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the instrument cluster display
and near the gear selector. If the "P" indi-
cator is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK.
As an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system
and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed
is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h).
4WD Low — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4WD LOW.
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given
when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
Vehicle is in 4WD Low range
The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle
into PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle
is in PARK by looking for the “P” in the
instrument cluster display and near the shifter.
As an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the “Normal Starting” procedure, it
may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there while the
engine is cranking. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run
for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the
brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h),
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in
an attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 345.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run,
but not have enough power to continue running
when the ignition button/key is released. If this
occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator
pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key
once the engine is running smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after a
10 second period of engine cranking with the
accelerator pedal held to the floor, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from
an authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and
it will decrease as the engine warms up.
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
The starter should not be operated for more
than 25-second intervals. Waiting a few
minutes between such intervals will protect the
starter from overheating.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at
a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying
again.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the engine with the transmission in the
NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake
before shifting to any driving range.
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition
switch briefly to the START position and release
it. The starter motor will continue to run and will
automatically disengage when the engine is
running.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long
as the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go key
fob is in the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
25 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, remove
your foot from the brake pedal and push the
ENGINE START/STOP button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or
pressing the accelerator pedal.
Under cold weather conditions, the engine
may not immediately crank if the "Wait to
Start" telltale is illuminated. This is normal
operation. For vehicles equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, the vehicle will automat-
ically crank when the "Wait to Start" time has
elapsed Ú page 126.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once,
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the
vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h),
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once will turn the engine off. The ignition will
remain in the ACC mode.
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h),
the ENGINE START/STOP button must be
held for two seconds (or three short pushes
in a row) to turn the engine off. The ignition
will remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF
mode) if the engine is turned off when the
transmission is not in PARK.
NOTE:
If the ignition is left in the ACC or ON/RUN
(engine not running) mode and the transmis-
sion is in PARK, the system will automatically
time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the
ignition return to the OFF mode.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
to an ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF,
ACC, RUN. To change the ignition switch positions
without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories follow these steps:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to change the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to change the ignition to the
RUN position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
third time to return the ignition to the OFF
position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Starting Procedure —
Engine Manifold Air Temperature
0°F To 66°F (–18°C to 19°C)
NOTE:
The temperature displayed in the instrument
cluster does not necessarily reflect the engine
manifold air temperature Ú page 90. When
engine temperatures fall below 66°F (19°C)
the “Wait To Start” telltale will remain on indi-
cating the intake air heater system is active.
Follow the steps in the “Normal Starting”
procedure except:
1. Pushing the engine start button with the
driver’s foot on the brake will move the
ignition from OFF or ACC to RUN, and
will illuminate the "Wait to Start" telltale.
The engine will not immediately crank, this
is normal operation.
2. The “Wait to Start" telltale will remain on for
a period of time that varies depending on
the engine temperature.
3. While the "Wait to Start" telltale is on, the
instrument cluster will additionally display a
gauge or bar whose initial length represents
the full "Wait to Start" time period. Its length
will decrease until it disappears when the
"Wait to Start" time has elapsed.
4. After the engine “Wait to Start” telltale goes
off, the engine will automatically crank.
5. After engine start-up, check to see that
there is oil pressure.
6. Release the parking brake and drive.
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains
on, DO NOT START the engine before you
drain the water from the fuel filters to avoid
engine damage Ú page 375.
CAUTION!
Do not crank engine for more than 25 seconds
at a time or starter motor damage may result.
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
wait at least two minutes for the starter to cool
before repeating start procedure.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
NOTE:
Engine idle speed will automatically increase
to 1,000 RPM and engage the Variable
Geometry Turbocharger at low coolant
temperatures to improve engine warm-up.
The engine will not automatically crank after
the engine "Wait to Start" telltale goes off if a
door or the hood is ajar.
If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is
left ON for more than two minutes after the
“Wait to Start” telltale goes out, reset the
intake air heater by turning the ignition switch
to the OFF position for at least 5 seconds and
then back ON. Repeat steps 1 through 6 of
“Keyless Enter-N-Go Starting Procedure –
Engine Manifold Air Temperature 0°F To 66°F
(–18°C to 19°C).”
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
The Cummins Turbo Diesel engine is equipped
with several features designed to assist cold
weather starting and operation:
The engine block heater is a resistance heater
installed in the water jacket of the engine just
above and behind the oil filter.
It requires a 110–115 Volt AC electrical outlet
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory
installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped,
heater cords are available from an authorized
Mopar dealer.
A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter hous-
ings aid in preventing fuel gelling. It is
controlled by a built-in thermostat.
An intake air heater system both improves
engine starting and reduces the amount of
white smoke generated by a warming engine.
NORMAL STARTING PROCEDURE —
E
NGINE MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE
A
BOVE 66°F (19°C)
Observe the instrument panel cluster lights
when starting the engine.
1. Always apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into PARK for an automatic
transmission.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position
and watch the instrument panel cluster
lights.
4. Place the ignition switch in the START
position and crank the engine. Do not press
the accelerator during starting.
5. Check that the oil pressure warning light
has turned off.
6. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains
on, DO NOT START the engine before you
drain the water from the fuel filters to avoid
engine damage Ú page 375.
CAUTION!
Do not crank engine for more than 25 seconds
at a time or starter motor damage may result.
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
wait at least two minutes for the starter to cool
before repeating start procedure.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURE — ENGINE
M
ANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE 0°F TO
66°F (–18°C
TO 19°C)
NOTE:
The temperature displayed in the instrument
cluster does not necessarily reflect the engine
manifold air temperature Ú page 90. When
engine temperatures fall below 66°F (19°C)
the “Wait To Start” telltale will remain on indi-
cating the intake air heater system is active.
Follow the steps in the “Normal Starting”
procedure except:
1. The “Wait to Start” telltale will remain on
for a period of time that varies depending
on the engine temperature.
2. While the “Wait to Start” telltale is on, the
instrument cluster will additionally display a
gauge or bar whose initial length represents
the full “Wait to Start” time period. Its length
will decrease until it disappears when the
“Wait to Start” time has elapsed.
3. After the “Wait to Start” telltale goes off,
place the ignition switch in the START
position. Do not press the accelerator
during starting.
4. After engine start-up, check that the oil
pressure warning light has turned off.
5. Release the parking brake and drive.
NOTE:
Engine idle speed will automatically increase
to 1,000 RPM and engage the Variable
Geometry Turbocharger at low coolant
temperatures to improve engine warm-up.
Automatic equipped vehicles with optional
Keyless Enter-N-Go – If the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pushed once while in PARK
with the ignition off and driver’s foot on the
brake pedal, the vehicle will automatically
crank and start after the “Wait to Start” time
has elapsed. If it is desired to abort the start
process before it completes, the driver’s foot
should be fully removed from the brake pedal
prior to pushing the start button again in order
for the ignition to move directly to off.
If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is
left ON for more than two minutes after the
“Wait To Start” telltale goes out, reset the
intake air heater by turning the ignition switch
to the OFF position for at least five seconds
and then back ON. Repeat steps 1 through 5 of
“Starting Procedure – Engine Manifold Air
Temperature 0°F To 66°F (–18°C to 19°C).”
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains
on, DO NOT START the engine before you
drain the water from the fuel filters to avoid
engine damage Ú page 375.
CAUTION!
Do not crank engine for more than 25 seconds
at a time or starter motor damage may result.
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
wait at least two minutes for the starter to cool
before repeating start procedure.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
STARTING PROCEDURE — ENGINE
M
ANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE BELOW
0°F (-18°C)
In extremely cold weather below 0°F (-18°C) it
may be beneficial to cycle the intake air heater
twice before attempting to start the engine. This
can be accomplished by turning the ignition off
for at least five seconds and then back ON after
the “Wait to Start” telltale has turned off, but
before the engine is started. However,
excessive cycling of the intake air heater will
result in damage to the heater elements or
reduced battery voltage.
NOTE:
If multiple pre-heat cycles are used before
starting, additional engine run time may be
required to maintain battery state of charge at
a satisfactory level.
1. If the engine stalls after the initial start, the
ignition must be turned to the OFF position
for at least five seconds and then to the ON
position to recycle the intake air heater.
NOTE:
Excessive white smoke and poor engine perfor-
mance will result if intake air heater is not recycled.
2. Heat generated by the intake air heater
dissipates rapidly in a cold engine. If more
than two minutes pass between the time
the “Wait to Start” telltale turns off and the
engine is started, recycle the intake air
heater by turning the ignition switch to the
OFF position for at least five seconds and
then back ON.
3. If the vehicle is driven and vehicle speed
exceeds 19 mph (31 km/h) before the intake
air heater post-heat (after start) cycle is
complete, the intake air heater will shut off.
4. If the engine is cranked for more than
10 seconds, the post-heat cycle will turn off.
NOTE:
Engine idle speed will automatically increase
to 1,000 RPM and engage the Variable
Geometry Turbocharger at low coolant
temperatures to improve engine warm-up.
When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of
fuel or the fuel gels at low temperatures, air
is pulled into the fuel system. If your engine
has run out of fuel Ú page 378.
If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is
left ON for more than two minutes after the
“Wait to Start” telltale goes out, reset the
intake air heater by turning the ignition switch
to the OFF position for at least five seconds
and then back ON. Repeat steps 1 through 5 of
“Starting Procedure – Engine Manifold Air
Temperature 0°F to 60°F (-18°C to 19°C).”
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING FLUIDS
The engine is equipped with an automatic
electric air preheating system. If the
instructions in this manual are followed,
the engine should start in all conditions.
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE
Observe the following when the engine is
operating.
All message center lights are off.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.
Engine oil pressure is above 10 psi (69 kPa)
at idle.
Voltmeter operation:
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation
at various engine temperatures. This cycling
operation is caused by the post-heat cycle of the
intake manifold heater system. The number of
cycles and the length of the cycling operation
is controlled by the engine control module.
Post-heat operation can run for several minutes,
and then the electrical system and voltmeter
needle will stabilize.
The cycling action will cause temporary
dimming of the headlamps, interior lamps, and
also a noticeable reduction in blower motor
speed.
WARNING!
Starting fluids or flammable liquids must
never be used in the Cummins diesel engine
(see Warning label). Never pour diesel fuel,
flammable liquid, starting fluids (ether) into
the air cleaner canister, air intake piping, or
turbocharger inlet in an attempt to start the
vehicle. This could result in a flash fire and
explosion causing serious personal injury and
engine damage.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS
Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F (0°C) may require special considerations. The following charts suggest these options:
Fuel Operating Range
NOTE:
Use “Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) Fuels” ONLY.
Fuel Operating Range Chart
*Number 1 ULSD Fuel should only be used where extended arctic conditions (0°F/-18°C) exist”.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Use of Climatized ULSD or Number 1 ULSD
Fuel results in a noticeable decrease in fuel
economy.
Climatized ULSD Fuel is a blend of Number 2
ULSD and Number 1 ULSD Fuels which
reduces the temperature at which wax crystals
form in fuel.
The fuel grade should be clearly marked on
the pump at the fuel station.
The engine requires the use of “ULSD Fuel”.
Use of incorrect fuel could result in engine
and exhaust system damage Ú page 433.
If climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD Fuel is
not available, and you are operating below
(20°F/-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions,
Mopar Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment
(or equivalent) is recommended to avoid
gelling (see Fuel Operating Range Chart).
Under some circumstances increased engine
noise may be audible in the seconds
following a cold start. This is most likely to
occur when using fuel that isn't blended for
the ambient temperature present. This may
occur on an unseasonably cold day or when a
truck is fueled in a warmer climate and driven
to a colder climate. The noise can typically be
prevented by using Mopar Premium Diesel
Fuel Treatment as recommended (see Fuel
Operating Range Chart).
Engine Oil Usage
For the correct engine oil viscosity Ú page 367.
Winter Front Cover Usage
A Winter front or cold weather cover is to be used
in ambient temperatures below 32°F (0°C),
especially during extended idle conditions.
This cover is equipped with four flaps for
managing total grille opening in varying ambient
temperatures. If a Winter front or cold weather
cover is to be used the flaps should be left in
the full open position to allow air flow to the
charge air cooler and automatic transmission
oil cooler. When ambient temperatures drop
below 0°F (-17°C) the four flaps need to be
closed. A suitable cold weather cover is available
from a Mopar dealer.
Battery Blanket Usage
A battery loses 60% of its cranking power as the
battery temperature decreases to 0°F (-18°C).
For the same decrease in temperature, the
engine requires twice as much power to crank
at the same RPM. The use of 120 Volts AC
powered battery blankets will greatly increase
starting capability at low temperatures. Suitable
battery blankets are available from an
authorized Mopar dealer.
Engine Warm-Up
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is
cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the
engine up to operating speed slowly to allow the
oil pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up.
NOTE:
High-speed, no-load running of a cold engine
can result in excessive white smoke and poor
engine performance. No-load engine speeds
should be kept under 1,000 RPM during the
warm-up period, especially in cold ambient
temperature conditions.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine
warm-up protection feature that may limit
engine performance after cold starting at low
ambient temperatures. The length of time
engine speed is limited is dependent upon
engine coolant temperature. Engine speed may
be briefly limited to 1,000 RPM after starting
with coolant temperature below freezing
conditions, and may be limited to 1,000 RPM
for up to approximately two minutes under more
severe cold conditions.
NOTE:
If ambient temperatures are low and the
coolant temperature is below 180°F (82°C),
the engine idle speed will slowly increase to
1,000 RPM after two minutes of idle, if the
following conditions are met:
Foot is off brake pedal and throttle pedal.
Automatic transmission is in PARK.
Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Applying the throttle will cancel fast idle.
Operating the exhaust brake at idle will
greatly improve warm-up rate and will help
keep the engine close to operating tempera-
ture during extended idle.
ENGINE IDLING
Avoid prolonged idling, long periods of idling
may be harmful to your engine because
combustion chamber temperatures can drop
so low that the fuel may not burn completely.
Incomplete combustion allows carbon and
varnish to form on piston rings, engine valves,
and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel
can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil and
causing rapid wear to the engine.
If the engine is allowed to idle or the truck is
driven on low engine speed drive cycles for more
than two hours, the system will automatically
enter an emissions operating mode that will
increase the engine idle speed to 900 RPM
(1,050 RPM for Chassis Cab). While in this mode,
which is designed to help maintain the Diesel
Particulate Filter, the engine idle speed will return
to normal when the brake pedal is applied.
A small change in engine tone or a slight change
in engine performance while accelerating may
also be noticeable at speeds below 20 mph
(32 km/h). This operating mode may last for up
to an hour of idle time, or around 20 minutes of
driving time.
Your truck may have been ordered with an
optional voltage monitoring idle up feature. If a
load is placed on the electrical system while the
truck is in PARK, this feature will attempt to
maintain normal system voltage by automatically
increasing engine idle speed. You may notice
several consecutive increases in idle speed, up to
a maximum of 1,450 RPM, as the system will
attempt to utilize the smallest increase in idle
speed necessary to maintain normal system
voltage. The idle speed will return to normal when
either the electrical load is removed, or when the
brake pedal is applied.
NOTE:
For instrument cluster display messages
related to the vehicle's exhaust system
Ú page 90.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
Idle-Up Feature
The driver-controlled high idle speed feature will
help increase cylinder temperatures and provide
additional cab heat, however, excessive idling may
still cause the exhaust after-treatment system to not
properly regenerate. Extended periods of idle time
should be avoided.
The Idle-Up feature uses the Cruise Control
buttons to increase engine idle speed and
quickly warm the vehicle's interior.
1. With the transmission in PARK, the parking
brake applied, and the engine running,
turn on the Cruise Control, then push the
SET (-) button.
2. The engine RPM will go up to 1,100 RPM.
To increase the RPM, push and hold the
RES (+) button and the idle speed will
increase to approximately 1,500 RPM.
To decrease the RPM, push and hold the
SET (-) button and the idle speed will
decrease to approximately 1,100 RPM.
3. To cancel the Idle–Up feature, either push
the CANCEL button, push the ON/OFF
button, or press the brake pedal.
NOISE
Diesel engines can create noises that may
seem as a concern. The nature of a diesel
engine is compression ignition where
compressed air and fuel are mixed and ignited.
Weather, barometric pressure, altitude and
temperature will affect how fuel is ignited in the
engine. Engines will sound different from day to
day or previous model years. Clicking, ticking, or
light knocking is normal and will change from
day to day, as the engine breaks in, and can
vary with changes in ambient temperature; this
is normal. Diesel equipped vehicles also have
an exhaust after treatment system to reduce
emissions utilizing a Diesel Particulate Filter
(DPF) and a Selective Reduction Catalyst (SCR).
The SCR reduces Nox using the Diesel Exhaust
Fluid (DEF) system. DEF is injected directly into
the SCR through an dosing module. This
process will create a clicking sound and at
times, will make noise even with the vehicle
shut off. This is normal as the DEF dosing
module is purging DEF. Fuel pump noise may
increase during low speed/light load conditions
when ambient temperature is above 100°F
(38°C), and when fuel tank level is below 10%.
This is a normal condition of the fuel system and
controls strategy. If at any time the check
engine light is on, please visit an authorized
dealer.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Idle the engine a few minutes before routine shutdown. After full load operation, idle the engine three to five minutes before shutting
it down. This idle period will allow the lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat away from the combustion chamber, bearings, internal
components, and turbocharger. This is especially important for turbocharged, charge air-cooled engines. Refer to the following chart for proper
engine shutdown:
IDLE SHUTDOWN
This feature can be enabled so that the truck will automatically shutdown when the truck has been idling for a set period of time when the engine is at
operating temperature. Idle time can be set in 5 minute increments between
5 and 60 minutes. See an authorized dealer to enable this feature.
NOTE:
The idle shut down timer is disabled while the PTO (Power Take-off) is active.
Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature Idle Time (min.) Before Engine Shutdown
Stop and Go Empty Cool Less than One
Stop and Go Medium - One
Highway Speeds Medium Warm Two
City Traffic Maximum GCWR - Three
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR - Four
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot Five
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
PROGRAMMABLE MAXIMUM VEHICLE
S
PEED
This feature allows the owner to set a maximum
vehicle speed for the vehicle. The 2500 and
3500 Series maximum vehicle speed can be set
between 40 mph to 87 mph (64 km/h to
140 km/h). The 4500/5500 Series maximum
vehicle speed can be set between 40 mph to
85 mph (64 km/h to 136 km/h). See an
authorized dealer to enable this feature.
NOTE:
DO NOT set the maximum vehicle speed to a
value greater than what the vehicle tires are
rated for.
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
Avoid Overheating The Engine
The temperature of the engine coolant
(antifreeze: a mixture of 50% ethylene-glycol and
50% water) must not exceed the normal range
of the temperature gauge 240°F (116°C) with a
21 psi (145 kPa) coolant pressure cap.
Usually the engine coolant (antifreeze)
temperature indicated during operation will be
to the left of center in the normal range of the
gauge.
Avoid Low Coolant Temperature Operation
Continual operation at low engine coolant
(antifreeze) temperature below the normal
range on the gauge 140°F (60°C) can be
harmful to the engine. Low engine coolant
(antifreeze) temperature can cause incomplete
combustion which allows carbon and varnish
to form on piston rings and injector nozzles.
Also, the unburned fuel can enter the
crankcase, diluting the lubricating oil and
causing rapid wear to the engine.
COOLING SYSTEM TIPS
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating in high ambient temperature
conditions, take the following actions:
City Driving — When stopped, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine
idle speed.
Highway Driving — Reduce your speed.
Up Steep Hills — Select a lower transmission
gear.
Air Conditioning — Turn it off temporarily.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil Pressure
When the engine is at normal operating temperature, the minimum oil pressures required are:
Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed
Parts
All engine failures give some warning before the
parts fail. Be on the alert for changes in
performance, sounds, and visual evidence that the
engine requires service. Some important clues are:
Engine misfiring or vibrating severely.
Sudden loss of power.
Unusual engine noises.
Fuel, oil or coolant leaks.
Sudden change, outside the normal operating
range, in the engine operating temperature.
Excessive smoke.
Oil pressure drop.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF)
M
ANUAL REGENERATION - IF EQUIPPED
On equipped Chassis Cabs, a manual
regeneration can be enable through the
instrument cluster. The manual regeneration
will allow the DPF to complete a regeneration,
lowering the soot level without having to drive
the vehicle. The vehicle must be in PARK to
access this feature, and the fuel level must be
over 12.5% full. A message displaying the time
left on the regeneration will appear on the
instrument cluster, and the instrument cluster
will display the soot level Ú page 90.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect
the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire
extension cord.
Gas Engine Only
The engine block heater cord is routed through
the grille by the right front tow hook.
It includes a removable cap that is secured by a
tethered strap. It also has a c-clip that is used
for storage when not in use for the Winter
months. During Winter months, remove the
heater cord wiring assembly from itself on the
c-clip.
Idle 700 to 800 RPM 10 psi (69 kPa)
Full speed and load 30 psi (207 kPa)
CAUTION!
If oil pressure falls to less than normal
readings, shut the engine off immediately.
Failure to do so could result in immediate and
severe engine damage.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the engine.
Diesel Engine Only
The engine block heater warms engine coolant
and permits quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the heater cord to a ground-fault
interrupter protected 110–115 Volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire
extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under
the hood to the right side and can be located
just behind the grille near the headlamp.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory
installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped,
heater cords are available from an authorized
Mopar dealer.
The block heater must be plugged in at least
one hour to have an adequate warming effect
on the coolant.
NOTE:
The block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
Block Heater Usage
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C),
engine block heater usage is recommended.
For ambient temperatures below –20°F
(-29°C), engine block heater usage is required.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent
with anticipated climate conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades
Ú page 440.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
Please check your oil level with the engine oil
indicator often during the break in period. Add
oil as required.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine does not
require a break-in period due to its construction.
Normal operation is allowed, providing the
following recommendations are followed:
Warm up the engine before placing it under
load.
Do not operate the engine at idle for
prolonged periods.
Use the appropriate transmission gear to
prevent engine lugging.
Observe vehicle oil pressure and tempera-
ture indicators.
Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
Vary throttle position at highway speeds
when carrying or towing significant weight.
NOTE:
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing
or no load operation will extend the time before
the engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel
economy and power may be seen at this time.
For additional vehicle break-in requirements
Ú page 205.
Because of the construction of the Cummins®
Turbo Diesel engine, engine run-in is enhanced
by loaded operating conditions which allow the
engine parts to achieve final finish and fit during
the first 6,000 miles (10,000 km).
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK.
The foot operated parking brake is located
below the lower left corner of the instrument
panel. To apply the parking brake, firmly push
the parking brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release
handle.
Parking Brake Release
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake
Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is
detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. Apply the parking brake before placing
the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE
(ENGINE BRAKING)
The purpose of the exhaust brake (engine
braking) feature is to supply negative (braking)
torque from the engine. Typically, the engine
braking is used for, but not limited to, vehicle
towing applications where vehicle braking can
be achieved by the internal engine power,
thereby sparing the mechanical brakes of the
vehicle.
Benefits of the exhaust brake are:
Vehicle driving control.
Reduced brake fade.
Longer brake life.
Faster cab warm-up.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave
the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so
may cause the vehicle to roll and cause
damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
The exhaust brake feature will only function
when the driver toggles it on by pushing the
exhaust brake button until the "Exhaust Brake
Indicator" is illuminated. Normal (Full Strength)
exhaust brake mode is indicated by a yellow
"Exhaust Brake Indicator".
Exhaust Brake Switch
Once the "Exhaust Brake Indicator” is
illuminated and the vehicle is moving faster
than 5 mph (8 km/h); the exhaust brake will
automatically operate when the driver removes
pressure from the accelerator pedal. Exhaust
braking is most effective when the engine RPM
is higher. The automatic transmission will
downshift more aggressively in TOW/HAUL
mode when the exhaust brake is enabled to
increase brake performance.
NOTE:
For optimum braking power it is recommended
to use the exhaust brake while in TOW/HAUL
mode.
The exhaust brake feature can also be used to
reduce the engine warm-up time. To use the
exhaust brake as a warm-up device, the vehicle
must be stopped or moving less than 5 mph
(8 km/h), the "Exhaust Brake Indicator" must be
on, and the coolant temperature must be below
180°F (82°C) and ambient temperature below
60°F (16°C).
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake technology
delivers smoother, less aggressive exhaust
braking characteristics during downhill
descents. Although it can apply full exhaust
braking force if needed, Automatic “Smart”
Exhaust Brake may not apply obvious braking if
the vehicle speed is not increasing. Automatic
“Smart” Exhaust Brake is intended to maintain
vehicle speed, while Full Exhaust Brake is
intended to reduce vehicle speed.
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake can be
enabled by pushing the exhaust brake button
(on the center stack) again anytime after the
normal Full Exhaust Brake has been turned on.
The “Exhaust Brake Indicator” in the instrument
cluster display will change from Yellow to Green
when Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake is
enabled. Pushing the exhaust brake button
again will toggle the exhaust brake mode to off.
WARNING!
Do not use the exhaust brake feature when
driving in icy or slippery conditions as the
increased engine braking can cause the rear
wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around
with the possible loss of vehicle control, which
may cause an accident possibly resulting in
personal injury or death.
CAUTION!
Use of aftermarket exhaust brakes is not
recommended and could lead to engine damage
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, turn the engine
OFF, and remove the key fob. When the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position, (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when
the ignition is in the OFF mode) the trans-
mission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
WARNING! (Continued)
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition (in a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go)
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF
mode. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently
leaving the vehicle without placing the
transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in
the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when
the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission
is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
mode) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. For vehicles with
8-speed transmission, to shift the transmission
out of PARK, the engine must be running and
the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake
pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
For vehicles with 6-speed transmission, to shift
the transmission out of PARK, the ignition must
be in the ON/RUN mode (engine running or not)
and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The BTSI will timeout if brake pedal is pressed
for three minutes or longer continuously while in
park. It can be reset by releasing the brake for
more then three seconds, then reapplying the
brake pedal or cycling the ignition.
EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
electronic gear selector located on the
instrument panel. The transmission gear range
(PRND) is displayed both above the gear
selector and in the instrument cluster. To select
a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector.
You must press the brake pedal to shift the
transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds).
To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such
as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear
selector to the appropriate detent. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within
a few hundred miles (kilometers).
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions.
Manual downshifts can be made using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control.
Pressing the GEAR -/GEAR + switches (on the
steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will
select the highest available transmission gear,
and will display that gear limit in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc Ú page 145. Some
models will display both the selected gear limit,
and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.
Electronic Transmission Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
(Continued)
(Continued)
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position
indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly indi-
cated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P), and is not blinking.
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply
the parking brake and shift the transmission into
PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL mode or use
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
to select a lower gear range Ú page 145. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will
improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
build-up.
During extremely cold temperatures
(-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission
operation may be modified depending on
engine and transmission temperature as
well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will
resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 350.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 215.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in certain gears,
or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may
be severely degraded and the engine may stall.
In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
more serious conditions, and indicate what
actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage
after engine shutdown, perform this procedure
only in a desired location (preferably, at an
authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The ERS shift control allows the driver to
limit the highest available gear when the
transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set
the transmission gear limit to FOURTH gear, the
transmission will not shift above FOURTH gear
(except to prevent engine overspeed), but will
shift through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at
any vehicle speed. When the transmission gear
selector is in DRIVE, the transmission will operate
automatically, shifting between all available
gears. Tapping the GEAR – switch (on the
steering wheel) will activate ERS mode, display
the current gear in the instrument cluster, and
set that gear as the top available gear. Once in
ERS mode, tapping the GEAR – or GEAR + switch
will change the top available gear.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
ERS Control
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the
GEAR + switch until the gear limit display
disappears from the instrument cluster.
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission
shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to
activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for
transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting.
TOW/HAUL Switch
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in
the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL
mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a
second time restores normal operation. Normal
operation is always the default at engine start-up.
If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be
pushed each time the engine is started.
SIX-SPEED AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Chassis Cab models may use either the
AS66RC or AS69RC transmission (which are
equipped with a Power Take-Off (PTO) access
cover on the side of the transmission case).
The transmission gear position display
(located in the instrument cluster) indicates the
transmission gear range. The gear selector is
mounted on the right side of the steering column.
You must press the brake pedal to move the gear
selector out of PARK
Ú
page 141. Pull the gear
selector toward you when shifting into REVERSE
or PARK, or when shifting out of PARK.
1 — GEAR + Switch
2 — GEAR – Switch
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
WARNING!
Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when driving
in icy or slippery conditions. The increased
engine braking can cause the rear wheels to
slide, and the vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control, which may
cause an accident possibly resulting in
personal injury or death.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
(Continued)
The electronically-controlled transmission
provides a precise shift schedule. The
transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop
within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions.
Manual downshifts can be made using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control.
Pushing the ERS (-/+) switches (on the steering
wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the
highest available transmission gear, and will
display that gear limit in the instrument cluster
as 1, 2, 3, etc Ú page 150. Some models will
display both the selected gear limit, and the
actual current gear, while in ERS mode.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the
gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, pull the gear
selector toward you and move it all the way
counterclockwise until it stops.
Release the gear selector and make sure it is
fully seated in the PARK gate.
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P).
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, turn the engine
OFF, and remove the key fob. When the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when
the ignition is in the OFF mode), the trans-
mission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
WARNING! (Continued)
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition (in a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go)
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must turn the igni-
tion to the ON/RUN mode, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the
gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing
for prolonged periods with the engine running.
The engine may be started in this range. Apply
the parking brake and shift the transmission
into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL mode or use
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
to select a lower gear range Ú page 150. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will
improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal
operating limits, the powertrain controller will
modify the transmission shift schedule and
expand the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent
transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is
in danger of overheating, the “Transmission
Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and
the transmission may operate differently until
the transmission cools down.
NOTE:
Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer
up a steep grade, or in stop-and-go traffic)
during hot weather. In these conditions, torque
converter slip can impose a significant addi-
tional heat load on the cooling system. Down-
shifting the transmission to the lowest possible
gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to
NEUTRAL (when stopped in heavy traffic) can
help to reduce this excess heat generation.
During cold temperatures, transmission
operation may be modified depending on
engine and transmission temperature as well
as vehicle speed. This feature improves
warm-up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm Ú page 151.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 350.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 215.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
On trucks with AS66RC or AS69RC
transmission, FIFTH and SIXTH gears may
be inhibited briefly on cold starts below
41°F (5°C), and during very cold temperatures
(-4°F [-20°C] or below), operation may briefly
be limited to third gear only. During this
condition, the ability of the vehicle to accelerate
under heavily loaded conditions may be
reduced. In all cases, normal operation will
resume once the transmission temperature has
risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission remains in THIRD gear regardless
of which forward gear is selected. If an
AS66RC/AS69RC equipped truck enters Limp
Home Mode at highway speeds, it will initially
engage FIFTH gear, until the vehicle slows to
a speed where THIRD gear can be engaged.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to
operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows
the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer
for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The ERS shift control allows the driver to
limit the highest available gear when the
transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set
the transmission gear limit to FOURTH gear, the
transmission will not shift above FOURTH gear,
but will shift through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode
at any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is
in the DRIVE position, the transmission will
operate automatically, shifting between all
available gears. Tapping the ERS (-) switch will
activate ERS mode, display the current gear in
the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the
top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping
(-) or (+) will change the top available gear.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
Electronic Range Select
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the ERS
(+) switch until the gear limit display disappears
from the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply push and
hold the ERS (-) switch. The transmission will
shift to the range from which the vehicle can
best be slowed down.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an
electronically controlled Overdrive (FIFTH and SIXTH
gears). The transmission will automatically shift into
Overdrive if the following conditions are present:
The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
The transmission fluid has reached an
adequate temperature.
The engine coolant has reached an adequate
temperature.
Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
The TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.
The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has
been included in the automatic transmission on
your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter
engages automatically at calibrated speeds.
This may result in a slightly different feeling or
response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically
disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage,
until the transmission fluid and engine
coolant are warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles
(2 to 5 km) of driving). Because engine speed
is higher when the torque converter clutch is
not engaged, it may seem as if the transmis-
sion is not shifting properly when cold; This is
normal. Using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control, when the transmission is
sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
transmission is able to shift into and out of
Overdrive.
1 — GEAR + Switch
2 — GEAR – Switch
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
CAUTION!
When using ERS for engine braking while
descending steep grades, be careful not to
overspeed the engine. Apply the brakes as
needed to prevent engine overspeed.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the vehicle has not been driven for several
days, the first few seconds of operation after
shifting the transmission into gear may seem
sluggish. This is due to the fluid partially
draining from the torque converter into the
transmission. This condition is normal and
will not cause damage to the transmission.
The torque converter will refill within
five seconds after starting the engine.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer,
carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent
transmission shifting occurs, push the
TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL mode.
This will improve performance and reduce the
potential for transmission overheating or failure
due to excessive shifting. When operating in
TOW/HAUL mode, transmission upshifts are
delayed, and the transmission will automatically
downshift (for engine braking) when the throttle
is closed and/or during steady braking
maneuvers.
TOW/HAUL Switch
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate
in the instrument cluster to indicate that
TOW/HAUL mode has been activated. Pushing
the switch a second time restores normal
operation. Normal operation is always the
default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is
desired, the switch must be pushed each time
the engine is started.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
There can be up to six auxiliary switches located
in the lower switch bank of the instrument panel
which can be used to power various electronic
devices and Power Take Off (PTO). If equipped,
it will take the place of the sixth auxiliary switch.
Connections to the switches are found under
the hood in the connectors attached to the
auxiliary Power Distribution Center.
You have the ability to configure the functionality of
the auxiliary switches via the instrument cluster
display. All switches can now be configured for
setting the switch type operation to latching or
momentary, power source of either battery or
ignition, and ability to hold last state across key
cycles.
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when
switch type is set to latching and power source
is set to ignition.
For further information on using the auxiliary
switches, please refer to the Ram Body Builders
Guide by accessing
https://www.ramtrucks.com/
ram-commercial/body-builders-guide.html
and
choosing the appropriate links.
WARNING!
Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when driving
in icy or slippery conditions. The increased
engine braking can cause the rear wheels to
slide, and the vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control, which may
cause an accident possibly resulting in
personal injury or death.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
(Continued)
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with
either a manually shifted transfer case or an
electronically shifted transfer case.
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER
C
ASE (EIGHT SPEED TRANSMISSION ) —
I
F EQUIPPED
This is an electronically shifted transfer case
and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch
(Transfer Case Switch), which is located on the
instrument panel.
Four-Position Transfer Case
This electronically shifted transfer case
provides four mode positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD High)
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD Low)
N (Neutral)
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each transfer case mode position, see
the information below:
2WD
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
4WD High
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range
provides torque to the front driveshaft (engages
four-wheel drive) which allows front and rear
wheels to spin at the same speed. This provides
additional traction for loose, slippery road
surfaces only.
4WD Low
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range
provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes
torque (increased torque over 4WD High) to the
front driveshaft, allowing front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This range provides
additional traction and maximum pulling power
for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in this range.
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain.
To be used for flat towing behind another
vehicle Ú page 214.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the N (NEUTRAL) position
without first fully engaging the parking brake.
The transfer case N (NEUTRAL) position
disengages both the front and rear drive
shaft from the powertrain, and will allow the
vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in
PARK. The parking brake should always be
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
This electronically shifted transfer case is
designed to be driven in the two-wheel drive
position (2WD) for normal street and highway
conditions on dry hard surfaced roads. Driving
the vehicle in two-wheel drive will have greater
fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not
engaged in two-wheel drive.
When additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4WD High and 4WD Low positions
can be used to maximize torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
by pushing the desired position on the
four-wheel drive control switch.
For specific shifting instructions Ú page 159.
The 4WD High and 4WD Low positions are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Driving in the 4WD High and 4WD Low positions
on dry, hard surfaced roads may cause increased
tire wear and damage to the driveline
components.
NOTE:
The transfer case Neutral button is located in the
center of the four-wheel drive Control Switch and
is pushed by using a ballpoint pen or similar
object. The transfer case Neutral position is to be
used for recreational towing only
Ú
page 214.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
(4WD High and 4WD Low) are located in the
instrument cluster and indicate the current and
desired transfer case selection. When you
select a different transfer case position, the
indicator lights will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn off.
2. The selected position indicator light will
flash until the transfer case completes the
shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator
light for the selected position will stop
flashing and remain on.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions
Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position
will remain on.
2. The newly selected position indicator light
will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new
transfer case position have been met. To retry
the selection, push the current position, wait
five seconds, and retry selection Ú page 159.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the
electronically shifted four-wheel drive system.
If this light remains on after engine start up or
illuminates during driving, it means that the
four-wheel drive system is not functioning
properly and that service is required.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could
cause damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD Low, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the two-wheel drive or 4WD High positions at a
given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met,
the transfer case will not shift. The position
indicator light for the previous position will
remain on and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all
the requirements for the selected position
have been met.
If all the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have been met, the
current position indicator light will turn off,
the selected position indicator light will flash
until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indi-
cator light for the selected position will stop
flashing and remain on.
2WD To 4WD HIGH
Push the desired position on the four-wheel drive
control switch to shift the transfer case. Shifts
between two-wheel drive and 4WD High can
be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion.
With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will
engage/disengage faster if you momentarily
release the accelerator pedal after turning the
control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position with
the engine either running or off. This shift cannot
be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC
position.
NOTE:
The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD/4WD High if the front and/or
rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this
situation, the selected position indicator light
will flash and the original position indicator light
will remain on. At this time, reduce speed and
stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when
powering down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD
Warning Light” is illuminated. Not engaging
the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll
which may cause personal injury or death.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
2WD Or 4WD HIGH To 4WD LOW
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of 4WD Low some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is
not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle
rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely
stopped. You can use either of the following
procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle
to 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the desired position
on the transfer case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is
on (not flashing), shift the transmission
back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position
and the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Push the desired position on the transfer
case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is
on (not flashing), shift the transmission
back into gear.
NOTE:
If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alter-
nate Procedure are not satisfied prior to
attempting the shift, then the desired posi-
tion indicator light will flash continuously
while the original position indicator light is
on, until all requirements have been met.
The ignition switch must be in the ON position
for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
switch is not in the ON position, the shift will
not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER
C
ASE (SIX SPEED TRANSMISSION ) — IF
E
QUIPPED
The electronically shifted transfer case is
operated by the four-wheel drive Control Switch
(Transfer Case Switch), which is located on the
instrument panel.
Four-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
This electronically shifted transfer case
provides four mode positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH)
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
N (Neutral)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each transfer case mode position, see
the information below:
2WD
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
4WD HIGH
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range provides additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range
provides low speed four-wheel drive.
It maximizes torque to the front driveshaft,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional
traction and maximum pulling power for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain.
To be used for flat towing behind another
vehicle Ú page 214.
This electronically shifted transfer case is
designed to be driven in the two-wheel drive
position (2WD) for normal street and highway
conditions on dry, hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4WD High and 4WD Low positions
can be used to maximize torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
by rotating the four-wheel drive Control Switch
to the desired position.
For specific shifting instructions Ú page 159.
The 4WD High and 4WD Low positions are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Driving in the 4WD High and 4WD Low positions
on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased
tire wear and damage to the driveline
components.
NOTE:
The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on
the lower left hand corner of the four-wheel drive
Control Switch. The transfer case NEUTRAL posi-
tion is to be used for recreational towing only
Ú
page 214.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both the
front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
(four-wheel drive and 4WD Low) are located in
the instrument cluster and indicate the current
and desired transfer case selection. When you
select a different transfer case position, the
indicator lights will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn off.
2. The selected position indicator light will
flash until the transfer case completes the
shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator
light for the selected position will stop
flashing and remain on.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions
Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position
will remain on.
2. The newly selected position indicator light
will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new
transfer case position have been met. To retry
the selection, turn the control switch back to the
current position, wait five seconds, and retry
selection Ú page 159.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the
electronically shifted four-wheel drive system.
If this light remains on after engine start up or
illuminates during driving, it means that the
four-wheel drive system is not functioning
properly and that service is required.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can
cause damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD Low, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the two-wheel drive or 4WD High positions at a
given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when
powering down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD
Warning Light” is illuminated. Not engaging
the parking brake may allow the vehicle to
roll, which may cause personal injury.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the
transfer case will not shift. The position indi-
cator light for the previous position will remain
ON and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been
met. To retry a shift: return the control switch
back to the original position, make certain all
shift requirements have been met, wait five
seconds and try the shift again.
If all the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have been met, the
current position indicator light will turn OFF,
the selected position indicator light will flash
until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indi-
cator light for the selected position will stop
flashing and remain ON.
2WD To 4WD HIGH
Push the desired position on the four-wheel drive
control switch to shift the transfer case. Shifts
between two-wheel drive and 4WD High can
be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion.
With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will
engage/disengage faster if you momentarily
release the accelerator pedal after turning the
control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position with
the engine either running or off. This shift cannot
be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC
position.
NOTE:
The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD/4WD High if the front and/or
rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this
situation, the selected position indicator light
will flash and the original position indicator light
will remain on. At this time, reduce speed and
stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
2WD Or 4WD HIGH To 4WD LOW
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of 4WD Low some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is
not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle
rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely
stopped. You can use either of the following
procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle
to 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the desired position
on the transfer case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is
on (not flashing), shift the transmission
back into gear.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position
and the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Push the desired position on the transfer
case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is
on (not flashing), shift the transmission
back into gear.
NOTE:
If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alter-
nate Procedure are not satisfied prior to
attempting the shift, then the desired posi-
tion indicator light will flash continuously
while the original position indicator light is
on, until all requirements have been met.
The ignition switch must be in the ON position
for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
switch is not in the ON position, the shift will
not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
MANUALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER CASE —
I
F EQUIPPED
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H)
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4H)
N (Neutral)
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L)
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each transfer case mode position, see
the information below:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range
locks the front and rear driveshafts together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. Additional traction for loose,
slippery road surfaces only.
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain.
To be used for flat towing behind another
vehicle Ú page 214.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks
the front and rear driveshafts together forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling
power for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
This transfer case is intended to be driven in
the 2H position for normal street and highway
conditions such as dry, hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the 4H and
4L positions can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together and force the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
This is accomplished by simply moving the gear
selector to the desired positions once the
appropriate speed and gear requirements are
met Ú page 159.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H
and 4L positions on dry, hard surfaced roads
may cause increased tire wear and damage to
the driveline components.
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in
the instrument cluster will alert the driver that
the vehicle is in four-wheel drive and that the
front and rear driveshafts are locked together.
This light will illuminate when the transfer case
is shifted into either the 4H or 4L position. There
is no light for the 2H or N (Neutral) positions on
some models.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the
4H or 4L positions at a given road speed. Take
care not to overspeed the engine and do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference
will adversely affect shifting and can cause
damage to the drivetrain.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can
cause damage to driveline components.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
NOTE:
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or
uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle
loading, or cold temperatures.
Shifting Procedure — Manually Shifted
Transfer Case
2H To 4H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with
the vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle
is in motion, shifts can be made up to 55 mph
(88 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the
transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal
after completing the shift. Apply a constant
force when shifting the transfer case lever.
2WD High Or 4WD High To 4WD Low
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of 4L some gear noise
may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h), shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever firmly to
the desired position. Do not pause in transfer
case Neutral.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both the
front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Pausing in transfer case N (Neutral) in vehi-
cles equipped with an automatic transmis-
sion may require shutting the engine OFF to
avoid gear clash while completing the shift. If
difficulty occurs, shift the transmission into
Neutral, hold your foot on the brake, and turn
the engine OFF. Complete the range shift to
the desired mode.
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped, however difficulty
may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not
being properly aligned. Several attempts may
be required for clutch teeth alignment and
shift completion to occur. The preferred
method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph
(3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or
disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster
than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
Do not attempt to shift into or out of 4L while
the transmission is in gear.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Light
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in
the instrument cluster is used to alert the driver
that the front axle is fully engaged and all four
wheels are driving.
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
The limited-slip differential provides additional
traction on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel,
particularly when there is a difference between
the traction characteristics of the surface under
the right and left rear wheels. During normal
driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit
performs similarly to a conventional differential.
On slippery surfaces, however, the differential
delivers more of the driving effort to the rear
wheel having the better traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful
during slippery driving conditions. With both rear
wheels on a slippery surface, a slight application
of the accelerator will supply maximum traction.
When starting with only one rear wheel on an
excessively slippery surface, slight momentary
application of the parking brake may be
necessary to gain maximum traction.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden
accelerations when both rear wheels are on a
slippery surface. This could cause both rear
wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide
sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in
a turn.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip
differential never run the engine with one rear
wheel off the ground since the vehicle may
drive through the rear wheel remaining on the
ground. You could lose control of the vehicle.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
POWER TAKE OFF (PTO) OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
This vehicle when equipped with PTO Prep and
the AS66RC/AS69RC automatic six-speed, will
allow for an aftermarket upfit with a transmission
driven PTO (power take off). The customer will
have the ability to operate the PTO in either
a “stationary”, “mobile” or “remote” mode.
The vehicles will be factory set to the “stationary”
mode. To select a different mode, or to change
any other PTO setting, you will need to enter the
commercial vehicle menu on the instrument
cluster screen. Details of the PTO selection
modes and further PTO information is available
at the Ram Truck Bodybuilders web site:
https://
www.ramtrucks.com/ram-commercial/
body-builders-guide.html
POWER STEERING
HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give
you good vehicle response and increased ease
of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system
will provide mechanical steering capability if
power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted,
it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under
these conditions, you will observe a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at very low
vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
Increased noise levels at the end of the
steering wheel travel are considered normal
and do not indicate that there is a problem
with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the
power steering pump may make noise for a
short amount of time. This is due to the cold,
thick fluid in the steering system. This noise
should be considered normal, and it does not
in any way damage the steering system.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a
defined service interval is not required. The fluid
should only be checked if a leak is suspected,
abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the
system is not functioning as anticipated. Check
fluid level when the engine is cold and off.
Coordinate inspection efforts through an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system
at the end of the steering wheel travel will
increase the steering fluid temperature and it
should be avoided when possible. Damage to
the power steering pump may occur.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level
surface and with the engine off to prevent
injury from moving parts and to ensure
accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill.
Use only manufacturer's recommended
power steering fluid.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper
indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any
spilled fluid from all surfaces Ú page 444.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system:
Cruise Control for cruising at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for maintaining
a set distance between you and the vehicle
ahead using Fixed Speed Cruise Control to
automatically adjust the preset speed.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if an ACC
distance is not set, Fixed Speed Cruise Control
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h), or 25 mph (40 km/h),
depending on the powertrain equipped in the
vehicle.
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Cruise
Control system has been designed to shut down
if multiple speed control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Cruise
Control system can be reactivated by pushing
the Cruise Control on/off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The cruise indicator light in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate.
To turn the system off, push the on/off button
a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn
off. The system should be turned off when not in
use.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power
steering system as the chemicals can
damage your power steering components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
1 — On/Off Button
2 — CANCEL
3 — RES (+)
4 — SET (-)
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed. Once a speed has been set, a message
“CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)” will
appear indicating the set speed. A cruise
indicator lamp, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster
display when the speed is set.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (-) button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When Cruise Control is set, you can increase
the speed by pushing the RES (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the RES (+) button, or SET (-) button
once will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the RES (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Controls is set, press the
accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
set speed.
Using Cruise Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. On steep hills, a
greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may
be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the
RES (+) button and release. Resume can be
used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the
CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from
memory.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Cruise Control without erasing the set speed
from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button, or placing the
ignition in the OFF position, erases the set
speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
E
QUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by Cruise Control
while traveling on highways and major roadways.
However, it is not a safety system and not
designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise Control
function performs differently if your vehicle is not
equipped with ACC
Ú
page 164.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control
engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your speed.
ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing
camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
ahead of you to maintain a set speed.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration
(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-
matically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the perfor-
mance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and
Forward Collision Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control alone (an ACC
distance not set) will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the
mode selected.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active
driver involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
and weather conditions, vehicle speed,
distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe
control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering
wheel operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Does not always fully recognize
complex driving conditions, which can
result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold
the vehicle for approximately two seconds
in the stop position. At this point, there will
be an “ACC may cancel soon” chime and
warning to the driver. When ACC is
cancelled, the system will release the
brakes and the driver must take over
braking. The system can be resumed when
the target vehicle drives off by releasing
the brake and pushing the resume button
on the steering wheel.
WARNING! (Continued)
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway construc-
tion zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Adaptive Cruise Control On/Off Button
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off Button
3 — CANCEL
4 — Distance Button
5 — RES (+)
6 — SET (-)
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the ACC on/off button until one of the
following appears in the instrument cluster
display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the RES (+) or the SET(-) button is pushed,
the display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the
minimum speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at
low speed
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Full Off
mode is active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off
and the instrument cluster display will show
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed
desired, push the SET (-) button and release.
The instrument cluster display will show the set
speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
an ACC distance set. To change between the
different modes, push the ACC on/off button
which turns the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on
(changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
20 mph (20 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal
can cause the vehicle to continue to accel-
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will
display in the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while an ACC distance is also set, the
system will not be controlling the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANCEL button is pushed.
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event
occurs.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous.
You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could
lose control and have a collision. Always leave
the system off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In the Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode
(no ACC distance set), the system will not
react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
proximity warning does not activate and no
alarm will sound even if you are too close to
the vehicle ahead since neither the presence
of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a
safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode
is selected.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.
Driver door is opened at low speeds.
A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
The trailer brake is applied manually
(if equipped).
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed
in memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES
(+) button and then remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster
display will display the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed
Cruise Control is being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
While in ACC mode when the vehicle comes
to a complete stop longer than two seconds,
the system will cancel. The driver will have
to apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a
standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a
stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in
close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the
set speed by pushing the RES (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the RES (+) button, or SET (-) button
once will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The new
set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the RES (+) button, or SET (-) button
once will result in a 1 km/h speed adjust-
ment. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released.
The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
When An ACC Distance Is Also Set:
When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
The ACC system applies the brake down to a
full stop when following the vehicle in front.
If your vehicle follows the vehicle in front to
a standstill, your vehicle will release the
brakes two seconds after coming to a
complete stop.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal.
In addition, downshifting may occur while
climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving uphill and
down-hill, the ACC system will cancel if the
braking temperature exceeds normal range
(over-heated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) can be set by varying the
distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one
bar (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the
distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
3 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
To adjust the distance setting, push the
Distance Button and release. Each time the
button is pushed, the distance setting increases
by one bar (longer). When the farthest distance
is set, pushing the distance button again will
reset to the shortest distance.
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving
vehicle is detected in the same lane, the
instrument cluster displays the ACC Set With
Target Detected Indicator Light, and the system
adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain
the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking force.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be
active when passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following the vehicle in front,
your vehicle will resume motion without any
driver intervention if the vehicle in front starts
moving within two seconds.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
Trailer Detect — If Equipped
When a trailer is detected, the ACC system
automatically defaults to the longest setting
(four bars). The setting can be overridden by
pushing the Distance Button on the steering
wheel.
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
If the vehicle in front does not start moving
within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, the ACC with Stop system will
cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel
message will display on the instrument cluster
display and produce a warning chime. The
driver must now manually operate the
vehicle's accelerator and brakes.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled
or the driver door is opened, the ACC system
will cancel and the brakes will release. Driver
intervention will be required at this moment.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while
driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or
tunnels with reflective tiles). The ACC system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under
rare conditions, when the radar is not tracking any
vehicles or objects in its path this warning may
temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor
is located in the camera in the center of the
windshield, on the forward side of the rearview
mirror.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully clear
the windshield.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without
any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at an autho-
rized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector,
an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is
not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” warning will display and a
chime will sound when conditions temporarily
limit system performance. This most often
occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on
windshield, driving directly into the sun and fog
on the inside of glass. In these cases, the
instrument cluster display will show “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
and the system will have degraded
performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in adverse weather conditions.
The ACC/FCW system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning
may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rearview
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system
will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have
the windshield and forward facing camera
inspected at an authorized dealer.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service
Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service
Required”, there may be an internal system fault
or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC
again later, following an ignition cycle. If the
problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
NOTE:
Aftermarket add-ons such as snow plows, lift
kits, and brush/grille bars can hinder module
performance. Ensure the radar/camera has
no obstructions in the field of view.
Height modifications can limit module perfor-
mance and functionality.
Do not put stickers or easy passes over the
camera/radar field of view.
Any modifications to the vehicle that may
obstruct the field of view of the radar/camera
are not recommended.
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs
to stay alert and may need to intervene.
The following are examples of these types of
situations:
Towing A Trailer
ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only
with an Integrated Trailer Brake Controller.
Aftermarket trailer brake controllers will not
activate the trailer brakes when ACC is braking.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
curve the system will resume your original set
speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
The driver must maintain control of the vehicle,
remain alert, and be ready to apply the brakes if
needed.
Turn Or Bend Example
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle
in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load,
traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills,
ACC performance may be limited.
NOTE:
The driver must maintain control of the vehicle,
remain alert, and be ready to apply the brakes if
needed.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely
in the lane in which you are traveling. In the
illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the
vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the
vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to
take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the
lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react
in situations where the vehicle you are following
exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in
your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the
brakes if necessary
Ú
page 449.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the
rear, and/or front fascia/bumper, and a detected
obstacle when backing up or moving forward (e.g.
during a parking maneuver). For limitations of this
system and recommendations, see
Ú
page 182.
ParkSense will retain the system state (enabled
or disabled) from the previous ignition cycle
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions,
the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. A warning will appear in the
instrument cluster display when the vehicle is
in REVERSE, indicating the vehicle is above
ParkSense operating speed. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE SENSORS
For the 3500, 4500 and 5500 Chassis Cab
vehicles, the rear ParkSense sensors are
shipped loose. Please refer to the Ram Body
Builders Guide for more information.
The four ParkSense sensors are to be located in
the rear fascia/bumper, and monitor the area
behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’
field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
NOTE:
If equipped as a dually, the ParkSense system
has six rear sensors to assist in detection
around the dually flares.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches
(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display
Ú
page 90. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE
or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle
has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear
regions based on the obstacle’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear region and the system will
produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change
from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert
operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio
tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected,
the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is
applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 228.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
Front ParkSense can be enabled and
disabled with the Front ParkSense
switch.
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the Rear ParkSense switch.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the Front or Rear system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will show a vehicle
graphic with an “Off” message overlay over the
system that is off (Front or Rear system). This
vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be
on when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or
requires service. The Front or Rear ParkSense
switch LED will be off when the Front or Rear
system is enabled. If the Front or Rear
ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system
requires service, the Front or Rear ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will be on.
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No No No Yes Yes
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the Front/Rear
ParkSense System has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
show the "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable
Service Required" or the "Front/Rear
ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Sensors"
message.
When the gear selector is moved into REVERSE,
a vehicle graphic will show in the instrument
cluster display, along with the display overlay
“Wipe Sensors.” If the system needs service,
the display overlay will read “Service.” Under
this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Wipe
Sensors" appears in the instrument cluster
display make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.
If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service
Required" appears in the instrument cluster
display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep
the ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations
could affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and Front or Rear ParkSense
is turned off, the instrument cluster display will
show "Off" on the vehicle graphic arcs. This
vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if obstacles such as bicycle
carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within
18 inches (45 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a
sensor problem, causing the “Front/Rear
ParkSense Unavailable Service Required”
message to be appear in the instrument
cluster display.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). It uses a forward looking camera to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle
position within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal has
been applied) OR the driver departs the lane on
the opposite side of the applied turn signal
(if the left turn signal is applied and the vehicle
departs to the right), the LaneSense system
provides a haptic warning in the form of torque
applied to the steering wheel, as well as a visual
warning in the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected
and the driver drifts across that lane marking
(no turn signal applied), the LaneSense system
provides a visual warning through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver
to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a
haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provide
an audible and visual warning to the driver if
removed. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly be disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on
the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch
Uconnect Display screen, the LaneSense button
is located above the display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense
On” message is shown in the instrument cluster
display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button again (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state (on or off) from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the
ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument
cluster display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
have not been detected and the LaneSense
telltale is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense Telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs on the left side.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the visual warning in the
instrument cluster display will show the left
lane line flashing yellow (on/off). The Lane-
Sense telltale changes from solid white to
flashing yellow.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With Yellow
Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines
Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, and both
the lane markings have been detected, the
system is "armed" to provide visual warnings
in the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs. The lane lines
turn from gray to white and the LaneSense
telltale is solid green.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left lane line turns solid
yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid green to solid yellow. At this time
torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Solid Yellow Lane Line) With Solid
Yellow Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left lane line flashes yellow
(on/off). The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in
the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With
Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust
the intensity (Low/Medium/High) of the torque
warning and the warning zone sensitivity (Early/
Medium/Late) that you can configure through
the Uconnect system Ú page 228.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward
Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows
you to see an on-screen image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio
display screen along with a caution note to
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView Camera is located in
the center of the tailgate handle.
NOTE:
For the 3500, 4500, and 5500 Chassis Cab
vehicles, the Rear Backup Camera is shipped
loose and not installed. Please refer to the Ram
Body Builders Guide for more information.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View
Camera:
1. Press the "Controls" button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the "Back Up Camera" icon to turn the
Rear View Camera system on.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode
is exited and the previous screen appears. When
the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
camera delay turned on), the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds
unless the following conditions occur: The vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is
shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position, or the user presses image
defeat “X” to exit out of the camera video display.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is
activated through the "Backup Camera" button
in the Controls menu, and the vehicle speed is
greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a
display timer for the image is initiated. The
image will continue to be displayed until the
display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will
be displayed continuously until deactivated
via the touchscreen button "X", the transmis-
sion is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen button "X" to disable display
of the camera image is made available ONLY
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
Cargo Camera Icons — If Equipped
Backup Camera Touchscreen Button
Cargo Camera Touchscreen Button
AUX Camera Touchscreen Button
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen
button is made available to indicate the current
active Camera image being displayed whenever
the Rear View Camera image is displayed.
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen
button to switch the display to Cargo Camera
image is made available whenever the Rear
View Camera image is displayed.
A touchscreen button "X" to disable display of
the camera image is made available when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE gear.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the backup camera image to illustrate the width
of the vehicle and its projected backup path
based on the steering wheel position. The active
guidelines will show separate zones that will
help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. These settings can be adjusted within
Uconnect Settings Ú page 228.
A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to
a hitch/receiver. The following table shows the
approximate distances for each zone:
Zones
Distance To The Rear Of The
Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth.
Do not cover the lens.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is
being displayed, and the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h)
while in any gear selector position,
Zoom View is available. By pressing the
“magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the
display screen, the image will zoom in to four
times the standard view. Pressing the icon a
second time will return the view to the standard
Backup Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is
in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera
delay view will display the standard Backup
Camera view. If the vehicle is then returned to
REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View
selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
REVERSE.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or
REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal
to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavail-
able and the icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
AUX CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two
AUX Cameras, which display a rearview image
from the trailer on the touchscreen.
Activation
The AUX Camera is activated by first pressing the
Backup Camera, Cargo Camera (if equipped), or
Surround View Camera (if equipped) button on
the touchscreen, followed by the AUX button
located in the upper left corner of the rearview
display. The AUX camera can also be activated
when the vehicle is in REVERSE by pressing the
AUX button.
If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can
switch between each camera by pressing the
AUX1 or AUX2 buttons on the Trailer Camera
display.
AUX1 Camera Button
AUX2 Camera Button
Deactivation
The AUX Camera is deactivated by pressing the
“X” in the upper right corner of the touchscreen.
This will return the display back to the
previously displayed screen.
NOTE:
If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX
Camera is connected, the touchscreen will
display a blue screen along with the message
“Camera System Unavailable.” The screen
can be exited out by pressing the “X” in the
upper right hand corner. This will return the
display back to the previously displayed
screen.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
Zoom View is not available with the AUX
Camera feature.
The display will always default to the Trailer
Camera display (AUX 1).
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround
View Camera system that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the surroundings and Top
View of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is
put into REVERSE or manually activated via the
Uconnect system. The Top View of the vehicle will
show which doors are open. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with
a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds,
this note will disappear. The Surround View
Camera system is comprised of three sequential
cameras located in the front grille and side
mirrors, in addition to a fourth Rear Back Up
Camera.
NOTE:
For the 3500, 4500, and 5500 Chassis Cab vehi-
cles, the Rear Backup Camera is shipped loose
and not installed. Please refer to the Ram Body
Builder’s Guide for more information.
The Surround View Camera system has
programmable settings that may be selected
through the Uconnect system Ú page 228.
Press this button on the touchscreen
to enter the Surround View Camera
menu in the Uconnect system.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the
Rear View and Top View is the default view of
the system.
If the camera delay is turned on, the camera
image will display for up to 10 seconds after
shifting out of REVERSE. The camera image will
not display for 10 seconds if the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted
into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. The “X” button on the touchscreen
disables the display of the camera image.
If the camera delay is turned off, the camera
image will close and display the previous screen
after shifting out of REVERSE.
If active guidelines are enabled, the lines are
overlaid on the image in the Rear View to
illustrate the width of the vehicle. The view
will also include the side view mirrors and its
projected back up path based on the steering
wheel position.
There are different colored zones to indicate the
distance to the rear of the vehicle. Refer to the
chart below:
Modes Of Operation
Standard Rear View can be manually activated
by selecting “Back Up Camera” through the
Controls menu within the Uconnect system.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system
with Rear View and Front View in a split screen
display. There are integrated ParkSense arcs in
the image at the front and rear of the vehicle.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of The
Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
The arcs will change color from yellow to red
corresponding the distance zones to the
oncoming object.
The fifth button of the ParkSense Camera View
screen will change based on the features present
in the vehicle. If not equipped with a Cargo
Camera or Trailer Reverse Guidance, the Backup
Camera soft button will be displayed. If equipped
with a Cargo Camera but no Trailer Reverse
Guidance, the Cargo Camera soft button will be
displayed. If equipped with both a Cargo Camera
and Trailer Reverse Guidance, the Cargo/Trailer
Reverse Guidance soft button will be displayed.
ParkSense Camera View
NOTE:
Front tires will display on the image when the
tires are turned.
Due to wide angle cameras in mirrors, the
image will appear distorted.
Top View will show which doors are open.
Open front doors will cancel the outside
image.
Rear View
This is the default view of the system
in REVERSE and is always paired with
the Top View of the vehicle with
optional active guidelines for the
projected path when enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view
of the Rear View. The Top View will be
disabled when this is selected.
Front View
The Front View will show you what is
immediately in front of the vehicle
and is always paired with the Top View
of the vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view
of the Front View. The Top View will be
disabled when this is selected.
Rear View Camera
Pressing the Backup Camera soft key
will provide a full screen rear view with
Zoom View.
NOTE:
If the Rear View Camera view was selected
through the Surround View Camera menu,
exiting out of the Rear View screen will return to
the Surround View menu. If the Back Up Camera
was manually activated through the Controls
menu of the Uconnect system, exiting out of the
display screen will return to the Controls menu.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
Cargo Camera
Pressing the Cargo Camera soft key
will provide a full screen view of the
cargo area.
NOTE:
If the Cargo Camera view was selected through
the Surround View screen, exiting out of the
Cargo Camera screen will return to the Surround
View screen. If the Cargo Camera was manually
activated through the Controls menu of the
Uconnect display, exiting out of the display
screen will return to the Controls menu.
Trailer Reverse Guidance
Pressing the Trailer Reverse Guidance
soft key will provide a full screen view of
the cargo area and trailer.
Pressing the Left & Right Tow Mirror
Split Screen View button within the
Trailer Reverse Guidance screen will
display a split screen to allow the
driver to see both sides of the trailer at the
same time. This view allows the driver to pan
left/right to better frame the trailer in the image.
NOTE:
Trailer Reverse Guidance can only be selected
through the Surround View screen; exiting out of
the Trailer Reverse Guidance screen will return
to the Surround View screen.
Zoom View
When the Rear View image is being displayed,
and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h)
while in any gear, Zoom View is available.
By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in the
upper left of the display screen, the image will
zoom in to four times the standard view. Pressing
the icon a second time will return the view to the
standard Rear View.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is
in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera
delay view will display the standard Back Up
Camera view. If the vehicle is then returned to
REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View
selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
(13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or
REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal
to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavail-
able and the icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
Deactivation
The system is deactivated in the following
conditions if it was activated automatically:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned on), the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up
to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is
shifted into PARK or the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. There is a touchscreen
button “X” to disable the display of the
camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the Surround
View Camera mode is exited and the last
known screen appears again.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system is deactivated in the following
conditions if it was activated manually from the
Uconnect controls menu via the Surround View
Camera button, Backup Camera button, Cargo
Camera button or Forward Facing Camera
button:
The "X" button on the display is pressed
Vehicle is shifted into PARK
Ignition is placed in the OFF position
Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
10 seconds
NOTE:
If the Surround View Camera, Cargo Camera,
Backup Camera, or Forward Facing Camera is
activated manually, and the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE, deactivation methods for auto-
matic activation are assumed.
The camera delay system is turned off manually
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 228.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
If a malfunction with the system has
occurred, see an authorized dealer.
Cargo Camera Zoom View
When the Cargo Camera image is
being displayed, and the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h)
while in any gear selector position,
Zoom View is available. By pressing the
“magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the
display screen, the image will zoom in to four
times the standard view. Pressing the icon a
second time will return the view to the standard
Cargo Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is
in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera
delay view will display the standard Cargo
Camera view. If the vehicle is then returned to
REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View
selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
Zoom View is available until the gear selector is
placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds are at
or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or
REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal
to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavail-
able and the icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the dynamic centerline
will not be visible.
Forward Facing Camera With Tire Lines — If
Equipped
The Forward Facing Camera displays a front
view image of the road ahead, along with tire
lines to guide the driver when driving on narrow
roads. Tire lines can be activated/deactivated
through the Uconnect settings.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
Activation
The Forward Facing Camera can be activated by
pressing the Forward Camera soft button on the
touchscreen.
Once activated, the camera image will remain
on as long as the vehicle speed is below 8 mph
(13 km/h) and the vehicle is not in 4WD Low.
Deactivation
The Forward Facing Camera is deactivated in
the following conditions:
The vehicle is not in 4WD Low and the vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h) for
10 seconds.
The “X” button on the display is pressed.
Vehicle is shifted into PARK.
Ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in 4WD Low, the Forward Facing
Camera image will be displayed until the “X”
button is pressed or the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. If the vehicle goes out of 4WD
Low, then the Forward Facing Camera will deac-
tivate.
Trailer Reverse Guidance — If Equipped
The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature assists
the driver in backing up a trailer by providing
adjustable camera views of the trailer and
surrounding area. The cameras are mounted on
the side mirrors and the images will be displayed
side-by-side on the touchscreen. Left and right
camera images are swapped and mirrored on the
touchscreen to show the equivalent area behind
the vehicle as though the driver is using the side
mirrors.
Activation
The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature can
be activated by pressing the Trailer Reverse
Guidance button on the Backup/Cargo Camera
Display.
Deactivation
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned on), the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to
10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. There is a touchscreen button “X” to
disable the display of the camera image.
If Trailer Reverse Guidance is selected through
manually activated Surround View, Backup
Camera, or Cargo Camera, the following
deactivation conditions apply:
The “X” button on the display is pressed
The vehicle is shifted into PARK
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
The vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h)
for 10 seconds
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the Surround View Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not equipped with a Pickup Box:
The bottom wedge of the Top View will be
displayed in black.
The Rear Cross Path soft button will be
grayed out.
The guidelines will not be overlaid on Top
View/Rear View and Full Screen of Rear View.
Black video will be displayed for the right side
of the Top and Rear View, and full screen of
the Rear View when the Rear View Camera is
not connected.
AUX CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two
AUX Cameras, which display a rearview image
from the trailer on the touchscreen.
Activation
The AUX Camera is activated by first pressing the
Backup Camera, Cargo Camera (if equipped), or
Surround View Camera (if equipped) button on
the touchscreen, followed by the AUX button
located in the upper left corner of the rearview
display. The AUX camera can also be activated
when the vehicle is in REVERSE by pressing the
AUX button.
If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can
switch between each camera by pressing the
AUX1 or AUX2 buttons on the Trailer Camera
display.
AUX1 Camera Button
AUX2 Camera Button
Deactivation
The AUX Camera is deactivated by pressing the
“X” in the upper right corner of the touchscreen.
This will return the display back to the
previously displayed screen.
NOTE:
If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX
Camera is connected, the touchscreen will
display a blue screen along with the message
“Camera System Unavailable.” The screen
can be exited out by pressing the “X” in the
upper right hand corner. This will return the
display back to the previously displayed
screen.
Zoom View is not available with the AUX
Camera feature.
The display will always default to the Trailer
Camera display (AUX 1).
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View
should only be used as a parking aid. The
Surround View camera is unable to view
every obstacle or object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using Surround View
to be able to stop in time when an obstacle
is seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using Surround View.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
ENGINE RUNAWAY
Diesel engine runaway is a rare condition
affecting diesel engines, where the engine
consumes its own lubrication oil and runs at
higher and higher RPM until it overspeeds to
a point where it destroys itself due to either
mechanical failure or engine seizure through
lack of lubrication.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE
ENGINE
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the
fuel tank is full.
NOTE:
Tighten the gas cap a quarter turn until you hear
one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the
Malfunction Indicator Light will come on.
Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the
vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
In case of engine runaway due to flammable
fumes from fuel spills or turbocharger oil
leaks being sucked into the engine, do the
following to help avoid personal injury and/or
vehicle damage:
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Using a CO2 or dry chemical type fire extin-
guisher, direct the spray from the fire extin-
guisher into the grille on the passenger side so
that the spray enters the engine air intake.
The inlet for the engine air intake is located
behind the passenger side headlamp and
receives air through the grille.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emissions
control system could result from using an
improper fuel tank filler tube cap (fuel filler
cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly-fitted
aftermarket cap can cause the MIL
(Malfunction Indicator Light) to illuminate
due to fuel vapors escaping from the
system.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the
MIL to turn on.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in
or near the vehicle when the gas cap is
removed or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the
engine is running. This is in violation of
most state and federal fire regulations and
may cause the MIL to turn on.
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place gas
containers on the ground while filling.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
If the vehicle diagnostic system
determines that the fuel filler cap
is loose, improperly installed, or
damaged, a loose gASCAP indicator
will display in the instrument cluster telltale
display area Ú page 90. Tighten the fuel filler
cap properly and push the RIGHT button to turn
off the message. If the problem continues, the
message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a
“clicking” sound. This is an indication that the
fuel filler cap is properly tightened.
Make sure that the fuel filler cap is tightened
each time the vehicle is refueled.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system to meet the
very stringent diesel emissions standards
required by the Environmental Protection
Agency.
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels
of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted from engines)
that are harmful to our health and the
environment to a near-zero level. A small quantity
of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is injected into the
exhaust upstream of a catalyst where, when
vaporized, it converts smog-forming nitrogen
oxides (NOx) into harmless nitrogen (N2) and
water vapor (H2O), two natural components of
the air we breathe. You can operate with the
comfort that your vehicle is contributing to a
cleaner, healthier world environment for this and
generations to come.
System Overview
This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust
Fluid (DEF) injection system and a Selective
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) catalyst to meet the
emission requirements.
The DEF injection system consists of the
following components:
DEF tank
DEF pump
DEF injector
Electronically-heated DEF lines
DEF control module
NOx sensors
Temperature sensors
SCR catalyst
UQS Sensor
For system messages and warnings Ú page 90.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place gas
containers on the ground while filling.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection
system. You may occasionally hear an audible
clicking noise. This is normal operation.
The DEF pump will run for a period of time
after engine shutdown to purge the DEF
system. This is normal operation.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very
stable product with a long shelf life. If DEF is kept
in temperatures between 10° and 90°F (-12°
and 32°C), it will last a minimum of one year.
DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest
temperatures. For example, DEF may freeze
at temperatures at or below 12°F (-11°C).
The system has been designed to operate in
this environment.
NOTE:
When working with DEF, it is important to know that:
Any containers or parts that come into contact
with DEF must be DEF compatible (plastic or
stainless steel). Copper, brass, aluminum, iron
or non-stainless steel should be avoided as
they are subject to corrosion by DEF.
If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up
completely.
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
The DEF gauge (located on the instrument
cluster) will display the level of DEF remaining in
the tank Ú page 90.
NOTE:
Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed,
load, etc.) will effect the amount of DEF that
is used in your vehicle.
Another factor is that outside temperature
can affect DEF consumption. In cold condi-
tions, 12°F (-11°C) and below, the DEF
gauge needle can stay on a fixed position and
may not move for extended periods of time.
This is a normal function of the system.
There is an electric heater inside the DEF
tank that automatically works when neces-
sary. And if the DEF supply does freeze, the
truck will operate normally until it thaws.
DEF Fill Procedure
NOTE:
For the correct fluid type Ú page 440.
Remove cap from DEF tank (located on drivers
side of the vehicle or in fuel door).
DEF Filler Cap And Fuel Fill Chassis Cab Models
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
NOTE:
The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds
to update after adding a gallon or more of
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to the DEF tank.
If you have a fault related to the DEF system,
the gauge may not update to the new level.
See an authorized dealer for service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank
heater will possibly warm up the DEF fluid
and allow the gauge to update after a period
of run time. Under very cold conditions, it is
possible that the gauge may not reflect the
new fill level for several drives.
At 40°F (4°C) you could see some increase
in the DEF gauge due to the tank thawing.
The gauge and level sensor are working prop-
erly and is just updating with proper thawed
DEF.
Excessive overfilling of the DEF tank can
result in a MIL lamp/fault code and inaccu-
rate level readings.
Refilling With Nozzles
You can fill up at any DEF distributor.
Proceed as follows:
Insert the DEF nozzle in the filler, start
refilling and stop refilling at the first shut-off
(the shut-off indicates that the DEF tank is
full). DO NOT proceed with the refilling, to
prevent spillage of DEF.
Extract the nozzle.
Refilling With Containers
Proceed as follows:
Check the expiration date.
Read the advice for use on the label before
pouring the content of the bottle into the DEF
tank.
After the indication appears on the instru-
ment panel display Ú page 90 fill the DEF
tank with no more than 6 Gallons (22 liters).
CAUTION!
To avoid DEF spillage, and possible
damage to the DEF tank from overfilling, do
not “top off” the DEF tank after filling.
DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below
12ºF (-11ºC). The DEF system is designed
to work in temperatures below the DEF
freezing point, however, if the tank is over-
filled and freezes, the system could be
damaged.
When DEF is spilled, clean the area imme-
diately with water and use an absorbent
material to soak up the spills on the ground.
Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is
accidentally added to the diesel fuel tank
as it can result in severe damage to your
engine, including but not limited to failure
of the fuel pump and injectors.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
Stop filling the DEF tank immediately if DEF
splashes or wells back in the filler neck.
Reinstall cap onto DEF filler tube.
Filling The Def Tank In Cold Climates
Since DEF will begin to freeze at 12°F (-11°C),
your vehicle is equipped with an automatic DEF
heating system. This allows the DEF injection
system to operate properly at temperatures
below 12°F (-11°C). If your vehicle is not in
operation for an extended period of time with
temperatures below 12°F (-11°C), the DEF in
the tank may freeze. If the tank is overfilled and
freezes, it could be damaged. Therefore, do not
overfill the DEF tank.
Extra care should be taken when filling with
portable containers to avoid overfilling. Note the
level of the DEF gauge in your instrument cluster.
You may safely add a maximum of 2 gallons
(7.5 liters) of DEF from portable containers when
your DEF gauge is reading ½ full.
VEHICLE LOADING
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear axle
systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited
so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
PAYLOAD
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
Never add anything other than DEF to the
tank – especially any form of hydrocarbon
such as diesel fuel, fuel system additives,
gasoline, or any other petroleum-based
product. Even a very small amount of these,
less than 100 parts per million or less than
1 oz. per 78 gallons (295 liters) will contam-
inate the entire DEF system and will require
replacement. If owners use a container,
funnel or nozzle when refilling the tank, it
should either be new or one that is has only
been used for adding DEF. Mopar provides
an attachable nozzle with its DEF for this
purpose.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load
on the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for increased
durability does not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
TIRE SIZE
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
RIM SIZE
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
INFLATION PRESSURE
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
CURB WEIGHT
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with
no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle.
The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or
cargo are added.
LOADING
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axles.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
of either the front or rear axle has been
exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store the heavier items down low and be sure
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all
loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR
Ú page 199.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus
the weight of all cargo, consumables and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded
in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and
rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear
axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed
either front or rear GAWR
Ú
page 199.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front
of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion to
dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions
while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow
small and medium sized trailers.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs
(2,267 kg) or more, it is recommended to use
a weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable
handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard
weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control
of your vehicle and cause a collision.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating
is exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by
applying leverage through spring (load) bars.
They are typically used for heavier loads to
distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions, it provides for a more level ride,
offering more consistent steering and brake
control, thereby enhancing towing safety.
The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer Sway Control
(TSC) and a weight distributing (load equalizing)
hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending
on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to
comply with GAWR requirements.
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight distributing
hitch system may reduce handling, stability
and braking performance and could result
in a collision.
Weight distributing systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
Recommended Distribution Hitch Adjustment
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to
the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
2. Measure the height of the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground, this
is height H1.
Measuring Height (H)
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground, this
is height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
distributing bars per the manufacturers’
recommendations so that the height of the
front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/
2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between
H2 and H1 above normal ride height [H1]).
6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer
and weight distributing hitch to confirm
manufacturers’ recommendations have
been met.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with TOW/HAUL mode engaged.
Fifth-Wheel Hitch
The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform
with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of
the tow vehicle in the truck bed. It connects a
vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling
king pin.
Your truck may be equipped with a fifth wheel
hitch option. Refer to the separately provided
fifth wheel hitch safety, care, assembly, and
operating instructions.
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted
coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted
in the bed of a pickup truck. The coupling arm
connects to the hitch mounted over the rear
axle in the truck bed.
Measurement
Example
Example 2500/
3500 Height (mm)
H1 1,030
H2 1,058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1,044
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH TYPE AND MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you
in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lbs (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Fifth Wheel/Gooseneck Greater than 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM
T
RAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
ramtruck.ca (Canada)
rambodybuilder.com
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, addi-
tional factory-installed options or dealer-installed
options must be considered as part of the total
load on your vehicle. For the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle
Ú
page 411.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the
“Scheduled Servicing” Ú page 353. When
towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or
GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely
side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers
heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
collisions.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
For the proper tire replacement procedures.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 406.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be diffi-
cult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
Integrated Trailer Brake Module — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer
Brake Module (ITBM) for Electric and Electric
Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes.
NOTE:
This module has been designed and verified
with electric trailer brakes and new EOH
systems. Some previous EOH systems may not
be compatible with ITBM.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
The user interface consists of the following:
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left
to activate power to the trailer's electric brakes
independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the
manual brake control lever is activated while
the brake is also applied, the greater of the two
inputs determines the power sent to the trailer
brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle’s stop lamps will
come on when braking normally with the vehicle
brake pedal. Only the trailer stop lamps will
come on when the manual brake control lever is
applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical
connection status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the
ignition is turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment
button or sliding the manual brake control lever will
display the GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the
“Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light” will not be
displayed.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
1 — GAIN - Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN + Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the
“Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light” will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake
control power output to the trailer brakes in
0.5 increments. The GAIN setting can be
increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased
to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake
control for the specific towing condition and
should be changed as towing conditions
change. Changes to towing conditions include
trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and
weather.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE:
This should only be performed in a traffic-free
environment at speeds of approximately
20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and properly adjusted. See a trailer dealer
if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical
connections according to the trailer
manufacturer's instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is
plugged in, the trailer connected message
should appear in the instrument cluster
display (if the connection is not recognized
by the ITBM, braking functions will not be
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate
and the correct type of trailer must be
selected from the instrument cluster display
options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the
steering wheel until “TRAILER TOW”
appears on the screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel
to enter “TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the
Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP
or DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer
Brake Type appears on the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer
on a dry, level surface at a speed of
20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze
the manual brake control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by
squealing tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if
the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the
GAIN setting.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at
a point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing
a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be
attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting
of 10.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
* The suggested selection depends and
may change depending on the customer
preferences for braking performance. Condition
of the trailer brakes, driving and road state may
also affect the selection.
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the
instrument cluster display. Display messages,
along with a single chime, will be displayed
when a malfunction is determined in the trailer
connection, trailer brake control, or on the
trailer Ú page 90.
NOTE:
An aftermarket controller may be available
for use with trailers with air or EOH trailer
brake systems. To determine the type of
brakes on your trailer and the availability of
controllers, check with your trailer manufac-
turer or dealer.
Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it
may cause damage to the electrical system
and electronic modules of the vehicle. See an
authorized dealer if an aftermarket module is
to be installed.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness
to a trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes
Electric over Hydraulic
Trailer Brakes
Electric over Hydraulic
Trailer Brakes
Load
*Under 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg) *Above 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg) *Under 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg) *Above 10,000 lbs (4,536 kg)
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with
the ITBM system may result in reduced or
complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a
increase in stopping distance or trailer instability
which could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible
with the ITBM system may result in reduced
or complete loss of trailer braking. There may
be a increase in stopping distance or trailer
instability which could result in damage to
your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
Trailer Light Check
This feature will run the trailer lights through a
sequence to check the trailer light function. It is
available in the instrument cluster under the
Trailer Tow menu Ú page 94.
When activated the feature will enable all of the
exterior lights sequentially for up to five minutes
allowing time to walk around and verify
functionality. The following exterior lights will
remain on for the entirety of the sequence:
Park/Running Lamps
Side Marker Lamps (if equipped)
License Lamp
Signature Lamp (if equipped)
Low Beams
Fog Lamps (if equipped)
Daytime Running Lamps
During this time the following lights will
sequence, each activating for three seconds:
1. Brake and CHMSL (third brake light)
2. Left turn signal
3. Right turn signal
4. Reverse Lamps
5. High Beam
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
This light check sequence will continue for a
total of five minutes.
The sequence will only activate if the following
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow
Package
Vehicle is in PARK
Vehicle is not in motion
Ignition in ACC or RUN
Remote start is inactive
Brakes are not applied
Left turn signal is not applied
Right turn signal not applied
Hazard switch is not applied
The sequence will cancel if any of the following
conditions occur:
Brakes are applied
Vehicle is shifted from PARK
Vehicle is no longer stationary
Left turn signal activated from stalk
Right turn signal is activated from stalk
Hazard switch is activated
Any button on the key fob is pushed
Ignition button is pushed
High Beam stalk position is changed
Sequence is canceled in the instrument
cluster
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing.
The transmission controls include a drive
strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing.
However, if frequent shifting does occur while in
DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower
gear range (using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control).
NOTE:
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower
gear range (using the ERS shift control) while
operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat build-up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission Only
When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades
at low speeds (20 mph [32 km/h] or below),
holding your vehicle in FIRST gear (using the
ERS shift control) can help to avoid
transmission overheating.
If you regularly tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation, then
change the automatic transmission fluid and
filter(s) as specified for "police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing." Ú page 354.
NOTE:
Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing (Six-speed automatic only).
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce potential for automatic transmission
overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when
driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear
range (using the Electronic Range Select (ERS)
shift control) on more severe grades.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
SNOWPLOW — IF EQUIPPED
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a
factory installed option. These packages
include components necessary to equip your
vehicle with a snowplow.
NOTE:
Before installation of a snowplow it is highly
recommended that the owner/installer obtain
and follow the recommendations contained
within the current Body Builders Guide. See an
authorized dealer, installer or snowplow manu-
facturer for this information. There are unique
electrical systems that must be connected to
properly ensure operator safety and prevent
overloading vehicle systems.
BEFORE PLOWING
Check the hydraulic system for leaks and
proper fluid level.
Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper
tightness.
Check the runners and cutting edge for
excessive wear. The cutting edge should be
¼ to ½ inches (6 cm to 1.2 cm) above ground
in snow plowing position.
Check that snowplow lighting is connected
and functioning properly.
SNOWPLOW PREP PACKAGE MODEL
A
VAILABILITY
For Information about snowplow applications
visit www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current
Body Builders Guide.
1. The maximum number of occupants in the
truck should not exceed two.
2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the
Rear GAWR should never be exceeded.
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the
addition of options or passengers, etc.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could
adversely affect performance of the airbag
system in a collision. Do not expect that the
airbag will perform as described earlier in this
manual.
CAUTION!
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if
exterior lamps are not properly installed.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
The loaded vehicle weight, including the
snowplow system, all aftermarket accessories,
driver, passengers, options, and cargo, must
not exceed either the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). These weights are specified on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label on the
driver's side door opening.
NOTE:
Detach the snowplow when transporting
passengers.
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was
set to specifications at the factory without
consideration for the weight of the plow.
Front end toe-in should be checked and reset
if necessary at the beginning and end of the
snowplow season. This will help prevent uneven
tire wear.
The blade should be lowered whenever the
vehicle is parked.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow
equipment following the recommendations
provided by the specific snowplow manufacturer.
OVER THE ROAD OPERATION WITH
S
NOWPLOW ATTACHED
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and
causes the engine to operate at higher than
normal temperatures. Therefore, when
transporting the plow, angle the blade completely
and position it as low as road or surface
conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph
(64 km/h). The operator should always maintain
a safe stopping distance and allow adequate
passing clearance.
OPERATING TIPS
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph
(32 km/h) should be maximum operating
speed. The operator should be familiar with the
area and surface to be cleaned. Reduce speed
and use extreme caution when plowing
unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Snowplows should be maintained in
accordance with the plow manufacturer's
instructions.
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and
battery terminals clean and free of corrosion.
When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and
drivetrain damage, the following precautions
should be observed.
Operate with transfer case in 4L when
plowing small or congested areas where
speeds are not likely to exceed 15 mph
(24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in
4WD High.
Vehicles with automatic transmissions
should use 4WD Low range when plowing
deep or heavy snow for extended periods of
time to avoid transmission overheating.
Do not shift the transmission unless the
engine has returned to idle and wheels have
stopped. Make a practice of stepping on the
brake pedal while shifting the transmission.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Two-Wheel Drive
Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Automatic transmission in PARK
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING — TWO-WHEEL
D
RIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive
models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are
OFF the ground. This may be accomplished
using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow
dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place
automatic transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the
dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position and
remove the key fob.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed
for towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
F
OUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
NOTE:
Both the manual shift and electronically shifted
transfer cases must be shifted into N (Neutral)
for recreational towing. Automatic transmis-
sions must be shifted into PARK for recreational
towing. Refer to the following for the proper
transfer case N (Neutral) shifting procedure for
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground
will cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do not disconnect the driveshaft because
fluid may leak from the transmission,
causing damage to internal parts.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any four-wheel drive
vehicle. Towing with only one set of wheels
on the ground (front or rear) will cause
severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON
the ground, or OFF the ground (using a
vehicle trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing
this vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the transfer case.
Before recreational towing, the transfer
case must be in NEUTRAL. To be certain the
transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL, perform
the procedure outlined under “Shifting Into
NEUTRAL”. Internal transmission damage
will result, if the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL during towing.
The transmission must be placed in PARK
for recreational towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on
level ground, with the engine running.
Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Shift the transfer case into N (Neutral):
With manual shift transfer case, shift the
transfer case lever into N (Neutral).
With electronically shifted transfer
case, push and hold the transfer case
N (Neutral) button. Some models have a
small, recessed "N" button (at the center
of the transfer case switches) that must be
pressed using a ballpoint pen or similar
object. Other models have a rectangular
N (Neutral) switch, below the rotary
transfer case control knob. The N (Neutral)
indicator light will blink while the shift is in
progress. The light will stop blinking (stay
on solid) when the shift to N (Neutral) is
complete. After the shift is completed and
the N (Neutral) light stays on, release the
N (Neutral) button.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 with automatic
transmission in DRIVE.
9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly
apply the parking brake. Turn off the engine.
For vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, push
and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button
until the engine shuts off.
10. Shift the transmission into PARK.
11. Place the ignition in the OFF mode, and
remove the key fob.
12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
13. Release the parking brake.
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft
because fluid will leak from the transfer
case, causing damage to internal parts.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
bar will be damaged.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both
the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to
roll, even if the automatic transmission is
in PARK (or manual transmission is in gear).
The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in
NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to
prevent damage to internal parts.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
NOTE:
With electronically shifted transfer case:
Steps 2 through 3 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the N (Neutral)
button, and must continue to be met until the
shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the
N (Neutral) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the N (Neutral) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements
are met or until the N (Neutral) button is
released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not
been met.
Shifting Out Of N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop,
leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine, and shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL.
With manual shift transfer case, shift the
transfer case lever to the desired position.
With electronically shifted transfer case
with rotary selector switch, push and hold
the transfer case N (Neutral) button until
the N (Neutral) indicator light turns off.
After the N (Neutral) indicator light turns
off, release the N (Neutral) button. After
the N (Neutral) button has been released,
the transfer case will shift to the position
indicated by the selector switch.
With electronically shifted transfer case
with push-button selector switch, push
and hold the switch for the desired
transfer case position, until the N
(Neutral) indicator light turns off and the
desired position indicator light turns on.
NOTE:
When shifting the transfer case out of
N (Neutral), turning the engine off is not
required, but may be helpful to avoid gear clash.
With 8-speed automatic transmission, the
engine must remain running, since turning the
engine off will shift the transmission to PARK
(and the transmission must be in NEUTRAL for
the transfer case to shift out of NEUTRAL).
5. Turn the engine off. Shift automatic
transmission into PARK. On 8-speed
transmissions the shifter will automatically
select PARK when the engine is turned off.
6. Release the brake pedal.
7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
8. Start the engine.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
10. Release the parking brake.
11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the
brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
With electronically shifted transfer case:
Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be
met before pushing the button to shift out of
N (Neutral), and must continue to be met
until the shift has been completed. If any of
these requirements are not met before
pushing the button or are no longer met
during the shift, the N (Neutral) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements
are met or until the button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not
been met.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or
other slippery surfaces may cause the driving
wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This
phenomenon occurs when there is a difference
in the surface traction under the rear (driving)
wheels.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause
sudden pulling of the rear wheels. You could
lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a
collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path
where water is flowing and/or rising (as in
storm run-off). Flowing water can wear
away the road or path's surface and cause
your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to
follow this warning may result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
(Continued)
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through shallow standing water, consider the
following Warnings and Cautions before doing so.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not
exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which
increases stopping distances. Therefore,
after driving through standing water, drive
slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal
several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing
water before driving through it. Never drive
through standing water that is deeper than
the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the
vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when
driving through standing water. This will
minimize wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is
milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine
can cause it to lock up and stall out, and
cause serious internal damage to the
engine. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 3.0
Ú
page 221.
For detailed information about your Uconnect 3
With 5-inch Display Ú page 244.
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display system or
your Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display
system, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer
or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance
of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle
systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted
source. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and
if installed in your vehicle, it may increase
the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
MULTIMEDIA 221
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information
and private communications without your
consent Ú page 116.
UCONNECT 3.0
INTRODUCTION
Uconnect 3.0
1 — RADIO
Push the RADIO button on the faceplate to enter
the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM,
FM, and SXM (if equipped), can be selected by
pushing the RADIO button on the faceplate until
the desired tuner mode is displayed.
2 — MEDIA
Pushing the MEDIA button on the faceplate will
allow you to switch from AM/FM/SXM modes to
Media mode (USB/AUX).
3 — Play/Pause/MUTE
Push to Play, Pause or Mute music or an active
phone call.
4 — Presets 1–6
These buttons on the faceplate tune the radio to
the stations that you commit to memory AM (A,
B, C), FM (A, B, C) and Satellite (A, B, C) — 15 AM,
15 FM and 15 SAT stations.
5 — Seek Down
Push the SEEK DOWN button on the faceplate
to tune the radio to the previous listenable
station or channel.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 MULTIMEDIA
6 — ON/VOLUME
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on
the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a
second time to turn off the radio.
The volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction without
stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob
to the right increases the volume and to the left
decreases it.
7 — AUDIO
Push the Audio button on the faceplate to
adjust the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or
Fade.
8 — MENU
Push the Menu button on the faceplate to scroll
between the setting submenus.
9 — Phone Pick Up
Push the Phone Pick Up button to initiate or
answer a phone call and send or receive a text.
10 — Phone Hang Up
Push the Phone Hang Up button to end a call.
11 — Seek Up
Push the SEEK UP button on the faceplate to
tune the radio to the next listenable station or
channel.
12 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL
Push the Enter/Browse button to accept a
highlighted selection on the screen. Rotate the
Tune/Scroll knob to scroll through a list or tune
a radio station.
13 — BACK
Push the Back button on the faceplate to return
to a previous menu or screen.
RADIO MODE
Operating Radio Mode
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
FM
AM
SXM SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Push the Radio button on the faceplate to enter
the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM,
FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pushing
the Radio button until the desired tuner mode is
displayed.
Switching The System ON/OFF
Push the On/Off Volume Control knob to turn on
the radio. Push the On/Off Volume Control knob
a second time to turn off the radio.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
played.
Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns
continuously (360 degrees) in either direction
without stopping. Turning the On/Off & Volume
control knob to the right increases the volume
and to the left decreases it.
Enter/Browse And Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency.
When scrolling through a list, push the
Enter/Browse button on the faceplate to
choose a selection.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
MULTIMEDIA 223
Seek Functions
Seek Up
Push and release the Seek Up button to tune
the radio to the next listenable station or
channel.
During a Seek Up function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing
through the entire band two times, the radio
will stop at the station where it began.
Seek Down
Push and release the Seek Down button to
tune the radio to the next listenable station or
channel.
During a Seek Down function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing
through the entire band two times, the radio will
stop at the station where it began.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology
to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast.
The subscription service provider is SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio. This service offers over
130 channels of music, sports, news,
entertainment, and programming for children,
directly from its satellites and broadcasting
studios. A one-year SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription is included.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit for more information.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. and its
subsidiaries. SiriusXM® Satellite Radio requires
a subscription, sold separately after the trial
subscription included with vehicle purchase.
Prices and programming are provided by SiriusXM®
and are subject to change. Subscriptions
governed by Terms & Conditions available at
www.siriusxm.com/customeragreement
.
SiriusXM® Radio US service is only available to
those at least 18 years of age in the 48 contiguous
United States, D.C., and PR. Service is available in
Canada; see
www.siriusxm.ca
.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US visit siriusxm.com/
getallaccess or call: 1-800-643-2112
Canada visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or
call: 1-888-539-7474.
Setting Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pushing any of the six
Preset buttons on the faceplate.
When you are receiving a station that you wish
to commit into memory, push and hold the
desired numbered button on the faceplate for
more than two seconds or until you hear a
confirmation beep.
The Radio stores up to 18 presets in each of the
Radio modes.
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
Push Audio button. Turning the Tune/Scroll
knob highlights the desired selection.
The Audio Menu shows the following options for
you to customize the audio settings:
Treble, Mid, Bass, Fade And Balance — Select
the desired setting to adjust, then push the
Enter/Browse button. Turn the Tune/Scroll
knob to adjust the setting + or – 9. Push the
BACK button on the faceplate when done.
Speed Adjusted Volume (if equipped) —
Select Speed Adjusted Volume and push the
Enter/Browse button. Turn the Tune/Scroll
knob to adjust the setting to Off, 1, 2, or 3.
Push the Back button on the faceplate when
done.
Loudness (if equipped) — Select Loudness
and push the Enter/Browse button to mark
the check box on or off. Push the Back button
on the faceplate when done.
AUX Volume Offset (if equipped) — Select AUX
Volume Offset and push the Enter/Browse
button. Turn the Tune/Scroll knob to adjust
the setting + or – 3. Push the Back button on
the faceplate when done.
Clock Setting
1. Push the Menu button at the bottom of the
radio, and push the Enter/Browse button
for System Settings. Next, select the Time
and Format setting and then select Set
Time by pushing the Enter/Browse button.
2. Adjust the hours or minutes by turning
the Tune/Scroll knob, then pushing the
Enter/Browse button to move to the next
entry. You can also select 12 hr or 24 hr
format by turning the Tune/Scroll knob,
then pushing the Enter/Browse button on
the desired selection.
3. Once the time is set, press the Back button
to exit the time screen.
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the Media
button on the faceplate located to the left of the
display. Once in Media Mode, press the Media
button in order to select the desired media
source.
Audio Source Selection
Push the Media button on the faceplate to
select the desired audio source, AUX, USB or
Bluetooth® audio device.
Seek Up/Seek Down
Push and release the Seek Up button on the
faceplate for the next selection.
Push and release the Seek Down button on
the faceplate to return to the beginning of the
current selection, or return to the beginning of
the previous selection if the Media is within the
first three seconds of the current selection.
Fast Seek Up
Push and hold the Seek Up button on the
faceplate and the desired mode will begin to
fast forward through the current track until the
button on the faceplate is released.
Fast Seek Down
Push and hold the Seek Down button on the
faceplate and the desired mode will begin to
rewind through the current track until the
button on the faceplate is released.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
MULTIMEDIA 225
USB Mode
USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
device into the USB port, or by pushing the
Media button. Once in Media Mode, push the
Media button and select USB. The display will
show the track number, and track time in
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start
of track one.
Bluetooth® Mode
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or
Bluetooth® Mode is entered by pairing a
Bluetooth® device containing music to the
Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device
must be paired with the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect system.
Once the Bluetooth® device is paired to the
Uconnect system, push the Media button
located on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode,
push the Media button and then select
Bluetooth®.
For mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions, please visit UconnectPhone.com.
AUX Mode
AUX Mode is entered by inserting an AUX device
using a cable with a 3.5 mm stereo audio jack
into the AUX port, or by pushing Media button.
Once in Media Mode, push the Media button
and select AUX.
If you insert an auxiliary device with the ignition
ON/RUN and the radio On, the unit will switch to
AUX Mode and begin to play when you insert the
device cable.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio. Use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
On/Off Volume rotary knob or with the volume
of the attached device.
NOTE:
The vehicle radio unit is acting as the amplifier
for audio output from the auxiliary device.
Therefore, if the volume control on the auxiliary
device is set too low, there will be insufficient
audio signal for the radio unit to play music from
the device.
PHONE MODE
Operating Phone Mode
Phone Mode Voice Commands
The Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, communications system with Voice
Command Capability. The Uconnect Phone
allows you to dial a phone number with your
mobile phone using simple voice commands.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Profile. To check mobile phone compatibility,
please visit UconnectPhone.com.
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit
DriveUconnect.com
or call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day, 7 days a week)
Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or
call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
Monday–Friday: 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Saturday: 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sunday: Closed
Changing The Volume
1. Start a call by pushing the Phone button, then
adjust the volume during a normal call.
2. Use the radio On/Volume rotary knob to
adjust the volume to a comfortable level.
Please note the volume setting for
Uconnect phone is different than the
audio system volume setting.
Making A Phone Call
1. Push the Phone button on the steering wheel.
2. After the beep, say “dial” or “call” and then
the full name or phone number.
NOTE:
A phone call can also be made by pushing the Phone
button on the radio, and selecting a particular
contact in the phonebook or recent calls.
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call
Push the “Play/Pause/Mute” button on
the radio or during a call, push the Voice
Recognition button on the steering wheel.
After the beep, say “mute” (or “mute off”).
Pairing A Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled mobile
phone. Mobile phone pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to
reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual.
Please visit
UconnectPhone.com
for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Push the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you
would like to pair a mobile phone.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
MULTIMEDIA 227
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Settings
button from the Uconnect Phone main
screen.
Select “Paired Phones”, and then select
“Add Device”.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
8. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to enter
the PIN.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system
reconnects to the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the
Uconnect system may interfere with the
Bluetooth® connection. If this happens, simply
repeat the pairing process. However, first, make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Phonebook Download — Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect Phone will ask you if you want
to download names (text names) and number
entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook
Access Profile may support this feature. See
UconnectPhone.com for supported phones.
Receiving A Call — Accept (And End)
1. When an incoming call rings or is
announced on Uconnect, push the
Phone button on the faceplate.
2. To end a call, push the Phone button on the
steering wheel or the Phone button on the
faceplate.
NOTE:
A phone call can also be accepted and ended by
pushing the steering wheel Phone button.
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset
And Vehicle
With a call in progress, use the Browse/Enter
knob to select “transfer” then push the enter
button or push the Phone Pick Up button on the
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 MULTIMEDIA
steering wheel controls during a call, push the
Voice Recognition button on the steering wheel.
After the beep, say “transfer call”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the Customer Programmable Features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display Touchscreen
And Faceplate Buttons
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, the
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display,
and Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display
Press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to display
the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
All settings should be changed with the igni-
tion in the ON/RUN position.
When making a selection, only press one button
at a time to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting “option” until a check mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Once the setting is complete,
press the X button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
MULTIMEDIA 229
Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the
touchscreen, the system displays the different
language options. Once an option is selected,
the system will display in the chosen language.
The available setting is:
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of
the touchscreen. The available settings are:
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available languages are
English, Français, and Español.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it
automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display brightness.
The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the
“-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will increase the brightness; the
“-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 MULTIMEDIA
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will
display in the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
Keyboard
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable keyboards are
“ABCDEF Keyboard”, “QWERTY Keyboard”, and “AZERTY Keyboard”.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five seconds or
stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Fuel Saver Display This setting will enable fuel saver mode in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption”
(MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature”
(°C or °F), and “Capacity” (Gal [US], Gal [UK], or L) units of measurement independently.
Setting Name Description
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
MULTIMEDIA 231
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
T
his setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system. The “Brief”
setting provides a shortened audio description from the system. The “Detailed” setting
provides the full audio description from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the command list on or off. The “Always” setting will always
show the command list. The “With Help” setting will show the command list and provide a brief
description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the command list off.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control the
time via the GPS location.
Set Time And Format/Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be off for
this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour format. The
“24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting to
be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours. The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off for this setting
to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the
minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Surround View Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the surround view camera when shifting out of reverse.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the surround view camera guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the rear backup camera when shifting out of reverse.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the backup camera active guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the backup camera fixed guidelines on or off.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
MULTIMEDIA 233
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings.
These options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen.
To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert
sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view, and
the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal
when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will
deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime
when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible
chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off.
LaneSense Warning
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane departure
feedback. The available settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a lane departure.
The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected and
provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 MULTIMEDIA
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a vehicle’s
blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the
Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both
the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Trailer Length For Blind Spot Alert
This setting will auto detect the length of an attached trailer. The “Auto” setting will have the
system automatically set the trailer length. The “Max” setting will always set the length to the
maximum 39.5 ft (12 m).
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay This setting will add a timed delay to the rear backup camera when shifting out of reverse.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
Power Side Steps
This setting will raise and lower or stow the power side steps. The available options are “Automatic” to
raise and lower the power side steps and “Stow” to deactivate the power side steps.
Setting Name Description
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
MULTIMEDIA 235
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position
and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to
their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. The available
settings are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the rain sensing auto wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchased.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after
the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off after
the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on
the key fob on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Steering Directed Lights
This setting will turn the headlights with the steering wheel. The available options are “On”
and “Off”.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
MULTIMEDIA 237
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches
12 mph (19 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed on
the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off”
setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting will
sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the
horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed to
unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the first push
on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one push of the
Unlock button.
Passive Entry This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter-N-Go) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked to
the key fob.
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 MULTIMEDIA
Power Side Steps
When the Power Side Steps button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to the lowering of the power side steps.
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort
When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems
when remote start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
Setting Name Description
Power Side Steps
This setting will raise and lower or stow the power side steps. The available options are “Automatic” to
raise and lower the power side steps and “Stow” to deactivate the power side steps.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated
Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats (if equipped) or
heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started.
The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only
activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the
comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Easy Exit Seats
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut off.
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
MULTIMEDIA 239
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options
When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These
settings will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
Suspension/Air Suspension
When the Suspension/Air Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off/Engine Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the vehicle
has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will decrease the
amount of time.
Auto Entry/Exit
This setting will automatically lower the vehicle ride height for easier entry and exit of the
vehicle.
Setting Name Description
Sound Horn With Lower This setting will sound the horn when the Lower button is pressed on the key fob.
Flash Lights With Lower This setting will flash the lights when the Lower button is pressed on the key fob.
Display Suspension Messages
This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster Display. The “All”
setting will display all available messages. The “Warnings Only” setting will only display
warning messages.
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 MULTIMEDIA
AUX Switches — If Equipped
When the AUX Switches button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the four vehicle AUX switches.
Aero Mode This setting will automatically adjust the vehicle ride height depending on the vehicle speed.
Tire Jack Mode This setting will disable the air suspension system to assist in changing a spare tire.
Transport Mode This setting will disable the air suspension system for flat towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode
This setting must be activated before performing a wheel alignment. Refer to an authorized
dealer for further information.
Four Corner Air Suspension Modes
There are three air suspension modes designed to protect the system in unique situations.
Tire Jack Mode is selected to assist in changing a spare tire. Transport Mode is selected to
assist when the vehicle is being flat bed towed. Wheel Alignment Mode is selected before
performing a wheel alignment. Refer to an authorized dealer for information.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
AUX 1-4
This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX switches. There are
two types: “Latching” and “Momentary”. The power source for the AUX switches can either be
set to run off the “Battery” or from the “Ignition”. In addition to setting the type and power
source, you can set if the vehicle will recall the previous state at which the AUX switches were
set. The Recalled Last State setting can be set to “On” or “Off”. Last state conditions are met
only if the type is set to Latching and the power source is set to Ignition.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
MULTIMEDIA 241
Trailer Brake/Trailer
When the Trailer Brake/Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change
the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
Setting Name Description
Trailer Select
Select from “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3”, and “Trailer 4”. These trailer designations can
be used to save different trailer settings.
Trailer Brake Type
This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available options are “Light
Electric”, “Heavy Electric”, “Light Electric-Over-Hydraulic”, and “Heavy Electric-Over-Hydraulic”.
Trailer Name
This setting will personalize the trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are hauling.
Select the trailer name from the following list: trailer, boat, car, cargo, dump, equipment,
flatbed, gooseneck, horse, livestock, motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utility, and 5th wheel.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right of
the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume will
increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external
audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port.
The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb” settings menu. The settings are “Auto Reply” (both,
text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (create
message).
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
Setting Name Description
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
MULTIMEDIA 243
SiriusXM® Setup
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can
be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
Reset/Restore Settings To Default
When the Reset/Restore Settings To Default button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect
system back to its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel
using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display of the
skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate
subscription.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory default.
Reset App Drawer This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from the
system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
1 — Radio Button
2 — Media Button
3 — Phone Button
4 — Volume & On/Off Button
5 — Mute Button
6 — Compass Button
7 — Settings Button
8 — More Button
9 — Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob
10 — Screen Off Button
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
MULTIMEDIA 245
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode and access the
radio functions and external audio sources Ú page 247.
Phone
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free phone system
Ú page 258.
Settings
Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 228.
Push the Enter/Browse button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted selection on the
screen. Rotate the Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the Mute button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system off. Push it again
to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off button on the
faceplate to turn the system on or off.
Feature Description
Compass Press the Compass button to access the vehicle’s compass.
More Press the More button to access additional options.
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using
the system. It contains instructions on how to
use the system in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the
touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety precautions.
Failure to do so may result in injury or property
damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. See an authorized dealer for
repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use
the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage
to the system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
etc.), which could scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly
on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber
lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the
touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow
the solvent manufacturer's precautions and
directions Ú page 449.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
MULTIMEDIA 247
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the
three and nine o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center and controls the
volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing
the top of the rocker switch will increase the
volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for
the next available station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next
available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the
next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go
forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch
goes to the beginning of the current track, or the
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play.
Double pressing the bottom button switch will
skip to the previous track if it is after eight
seconds into the current track.
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — All Preset Radio Stations
3 — Radio Band (AM/FM)
4 — Seek Down
5 — Tune
6 — Station Info
7 — Seek Up
8 — Audio Settings
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 MULTIMEDIA
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to
enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes,
AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected by
pressing the corresponding buttons in Radio
Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the Volume & On/Off control knob to turn
on and off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns
continuously (360 degrees) in either direction,
without stopping. Turning the Volume & On/Off
control knob clockwise increases the volume,
and counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
played.
Mute Button
Push the Mute button to mute or unmute the
system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated
by pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pressing the left steering
wheel audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek
Down button to tune the radio to the next
available station or channel. During a Seek Up/
Down function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band
two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the Seek
Up or Seek Down button to advance the
radio through the available stations or channels
at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next
available station or channel when the button on
the touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
Info — If Equipped
Press the Info button to display information
related to the currently playing song and radio
station.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of
the radio screen to directly tune to a desired
radio station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired
station. Once a number has been entered,
any numbers that are no longer possible
(stations that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/grayed out.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
MULTIMEDIA 249
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been
entered, press “GO”. The Direct Tune screen will
close, and the system will automatically tune to
that station.
Radio Voice Commands
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel
and wait for the beep to say a command.
See some examples below.
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “Help”. The
system provides you with a list of commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and
bill at then-current rates until you call
SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel.
See SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for
complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (US) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change.
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
USA and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is
also available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite
service area and in AK. © 2020 SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground
parking garages or tunnels.
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 MULTIMEDIA
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US residents visit siriusxm.com/
getallaccess or call: 1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents visit https://
www.siriusxm.ca/ or call: 1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the
top of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed
in the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are
displayed below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions
common to all radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather button, and Favorite button functions
are available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio
1 — Browse
2 — Radio Bands
3 — Direct Tune
4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
MULTIMEDIA 251
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched,
content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The play/pause, rewind/forward and live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause
the playing of live or rewound content at any time. Play can
be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button again on
the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the
content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind
button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds
rewinds the content. The radio begins playing the content
at the point at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen
forwards the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding
of the content can only be done when the content is
previously rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live
content. A continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio begins
playing the content at the point at which the press is
release.
Live Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the
playing of live content.
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 MULTIMEDIA
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to
activate the favorites menu, which will time out
within 20 seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of
the X button.
The favorites feature enables you to set a favorite
artist or song that is currently playing. The radio then
uses this information to alert you when either the
favorite artist or song is being played at any time by
any of the SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite artist, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist
button on the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite song, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Song
button on the touchscreen.
Browse In SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen.
When pressing the All button, the following
categories become available:
Channel List Press the Channel List to display
all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by oper-
ating the Tune/Scroll knob.
Genre List Press the Genre button on the
touchscreen to display a list of Genres. You
can select any desired Genre by pressing the
Genre List. The radio tunes to a channel with
the content in the selected Genre.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse
screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the
Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings,
along with providing a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the
Up and Down arrows located at the right side
of the screen. Scrolling can also be done by
operating the Tune/Scroll knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of
the screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press the
Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu allows
you to choose from a visual alert or audible and
visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on
any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left
of the Browse screen. This feature provides
you with the ability to select teams, edit the
selection, and set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen.
The On-Air list provides a list of Channels
currently airing any of the items in the
Selections list, and pressing any of the items
in the list tunes the radio to that channel.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
MULTIMEDIA 253
Add/Delete — If Equipped
Press the Add/Delete button on the touchscreen to
activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen
league and a scroll list of all teams within the league
will appear, then you can select a team by pressing
the corresponding box. A check mark appears for all
teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of
the screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or press
the Trash Can icon next to the selection to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music channel
using one of the 12 presets. This feature occurs
the first time the preset is selected during that
current song.
Setting Presets
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pressing any of the Preset
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save
as a preset, press and hold the numbered
button on the touchscreen for more than
two seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio Modes.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
A set of four presets will appear on the screen.
Press the All button to view all saved presets.
To remove a saved preset, a new preset must
be saved over the old one.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound
5 — Loudness
6 — AUX Volume Offset
7 — Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio
between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front
speakers. Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and drag
the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or
decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”,
and “3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed
increases to compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every
direction as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This
alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between
plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play — If Equipped
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media
device is connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is
turned on. Press “Off” to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until
the driver or passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay
selected time has expired.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
MULTIMEDIA 255
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate.
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or
Source Select button on the touchscreen and
the desired mode button on the touchscreen.
USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the Media
sources available. When available, you can
select the Browse button on the touchscreen to
be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media
Mode is entered by pushing the Media button
located on the faceplate.
Types of Media Modes
USB Mode
Overview
USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
device into the USB Port, or by pushing the
MEDIA button on the faceplate and then
selecting the USB button.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you
insert a USB device with the ignition ON, the unit
will switch to USB Mode and begin to play.
The display will show the track number and
index time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track 1.
Bluetooth® Mode
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth®
Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth®
device, containing music, to the Uconnect
system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device
must be paired to the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect system.
1 — Seek Down
2 — Seek Up
3 — Browse
4 — Source
5 — Pause/Play
6 — Info
7 — More Options
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 MULTIMEDIA
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the
MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once in
Media Mode, press the Source button on the
touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button
Ú page 258.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the
Bluetooth® button on the left side of the
touchscreen or under the Source Select/Select
Source button (if equipped).
AUX Mode
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio
jack into the AUX port or pushing the MEDIA
button on the faceplate and then selecting the
Source button and then the AUX button.
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX Port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and
the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode
and begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
Volume button, Volume/Mute rotary knob, or
the On/Off rotary knob, or with the volume of
the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device. Press and release the Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or to return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the
USB device is within the first three seconds of
the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the
Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next
selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
current selection, or return to the beginning of
the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device
is within the first second of the current
selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to display the browse window.
In USB Mode, the left side of the browse window
displays a list of ways you can browse through
the contents of the USB device. If supported by
the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist,
Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired
button on the touchscreen on the left side of the
screen. The center of the browse window shows
items and its sub-functions, which can be
scrolled through by pressing the Up and Down
buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob can
also be used to scroll.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate the
Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll
through and select a desired track on the device.
Press the Exit button on the touchscreen if you
wish to cancel the Browse function.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
MULTIMEDIA 257
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio
source: USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
the touchscreen to select the desired audio
source: Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on
the touchscreen to select the desired audio
source: AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality.
The Repeat button on the touchscreen is
highlighted when active. The Radio will continue
to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button
again to enter Repeat All. The radio will continue
to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as long
as the repeat function is active. To cancel
Repeat, press the Repeat button a third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
Audio button Ú page 247.
Info
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Info
button on the touchscreen to display the
current track information. Press the Info or X
button on the touchscreen a second time to
cancel this feature.
Tracks
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Tracks
button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up
with the Song List. The song currently playing is
indicated by an arrow and lines above and
below the song title. When in the Tracks List
screen you can rotate the Tune/Scroll knob to
highlight a track (indicated by the line above
and below the track name) and then push the
Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
supports this feature, press the Tracks button
on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with
the Song List. The currently playing song is
indicated by a red arrow and lines above and
below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
Media Voice Commands
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth®, and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice
operation is only available for connected USB
and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering
wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 MULTIMEDIA
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match
exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre
information is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
It allows you to dial a phone number with your
mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John
Smith Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search
for John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phone-
books displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so
they are easily accessible on the Main Phone
screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent
Call logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
easy access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using
the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
mute the system's microphone for private
conversation.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
MULTIMEDIA 259
The Phone feature is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different electronic
devices to connect to each other without wires or
a docking station. Ensure you phone is turned on
with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to
the Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or
audio devices are allowed to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone
and one audio device can be used with the
system at a time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel is
used to get into the Phone Mode and make
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls,
view phonebook, etc. When you press the
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your
signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you are
already in a call or want to make another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also
used to access the Voice Commands for the
Uconnect Voice Command features if your
vehicle is equipped.
Phone Operation
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu
structure. Voice commands are required after
most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two
general methods for how Voice Command
works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command
and then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must
wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen”
prompt or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound
commands can be used. For example,
instead of saying “Call” and then “John
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John
Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section, only
the compound command form of the voice
command is given. You can also break the
commands into parts and say each part of
the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound
command form voice command “Search for
John Smith,” or you can break the compound
command form into two voice commands:
“Search Contacts” and when asked, “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect Phone
works best when you talk in a normal conversa-
tional tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a
few feet/meters away from you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR)
engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences.
The system filters out certain non-word
utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.”
The system handles fill-in words such as “I would
like to”.
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 MULTIMEDIA
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone call”
and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in the
same phrase or sentence, the system identifies
the topic or context and provides the associated
follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to
call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not
recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system requires more information from the
user, it will ask a question to which the user can
respond without pushing the Voice Command
button on the steering wheel.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
want to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
simply push the Phone button (if active) on your
steering wheel and say a command or say
“Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a push
of the VR button or the Phone button.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone
button on your steering wheel when the system
is listening for a command and be returned to
the main or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need
to reference your mobile phone’s manual.
Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow the steps below to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
MULTIMEDIA 261
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters Phone Mode and no other device(s)
have previously been paired. If the system
has a phone previously paired, even if no
phone is currently connected with the
system, this pop-up will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the
PIN from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or
Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system will
reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The most recent phone
paired will have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
system to access your “messages” and
“contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
your contacts with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the
Uconnect system may interfere with the
Bluetooth® connection. If this happens, simply
repeat the pairing process. However, first make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
Device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or audio device follow these
steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Disconnecting or Deleting A Phone Or Audio
Device
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or
Settings button.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name for a different
phone or audio device than the currently
connected device or press the preferred
Connected Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources
screen, press the Settings button located
to the right of the device name for a
different phone or audio device than the
currently connected device or press the
preferred “Connected Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
1 — Disconnect Device Or Disconnect Phone
2 — Make Favorite
3 — Delete Device/Phone
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
MULTIMEDIA 263
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone
has the ability to download contact names and
number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. Your mobile phone may receive a
pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect
system to access your messages and contacts.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website,
UconnectPhone.com
,
for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook, follow the procedure in the
“Voice Command” in this section.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
four numbers per contact will be downloaded
and updated every time a phone is
connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay
before the latest downloaded names can be
used. Until then, if available, the previously
downloaded phonebook is available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Managing Your Favorites — If Equipped
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen,
and then press one of the +Add Favorite
Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen,
and then select the appropriate number.
Press the Down Arrow button next to the
selected number to display the option’s
pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to
Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
To Remove A Favorite — If Equipped
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”
from the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon next to the
contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for
that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the
Favorite.
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are
available and supported by Bluetooth® on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
service plan provides three-way calling, this
feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
Listed below are the phone options with
Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the
following call features:
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
Key Pad Number Entry
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and
press “Dial/Call”.
Recent Calls — If Equipped
You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your steering
wheel and perform the above operation.
For example, say “Show my incoming calls”.
1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Ignore
4 — Transfer
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
MULTIMEDIA 265
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system. Push the Phone button on the
steering wheel, press the Answer button on the
touchscreen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold
and answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is
in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer
an incoming call or ignore it.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while Do Not
Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 MULTIMEDIA
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On
Hold button on the Phone main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
dial a number from the keypad (if supported by
your mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or
from the phonebooks.
Toggling Between Calls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Swap Calls button on the
phone main screen. Only one call can be placed
on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and
one on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button
on the Phone main screen to combine all calls
into a conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone
End button on the steering wheel. Only the active
call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on
hold, it will become the new active call.
Redial
Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
that was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
ignition has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-
mended to press the Transfer button on the
touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your connected mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the
Transfer button on the Phone main screen.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
MULTIMEDIA 267
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is
speaking during a voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not
always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names
in your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is
in motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may not
be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook
button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com
for mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 MULTIMEDIA
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep
to say a command. See some examples below:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123 456 7890”
“Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
“Call back” (call previously answered
incoming phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice
Command, push the Phone button and say
“Call”, then pronounce the name exactly as it
appears in your phonebook. When a contact
has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce incoming text
messages. Push the VR button or Phone
button and say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an
incoming text message. (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messag-
es and follow the system prompts.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose
the message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the full
implementation of the Message Access Profile
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com
.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on
your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s®
“User Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not
compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is
equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected
to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use
your voice to send text messages, select media,
place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean
and responds back to confirm your requests.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
MULTIMEDIA 269
The system is designed to keep your eyes on the
road and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri
help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep,
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones may lose connection to the Uconnect
Phone. When this happens, the connection can
generally be re-established by restarting the mobile
phone. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either
the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language
change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior
to using the system
Ú
page 449.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may be
lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile
phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to
the radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume
be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers.
The level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio Ú page 449.
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 MULTIMEDIA
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road
Pages which display vehicle information related
to the drivetrain, transfer case, and coolant/oil
gauges.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps
button on the touchscreen, and then select
Off-Road Pages.
Main Menu
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along
the bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in
each of the three selectable page options. It
provides information for the following items:
1. Transfer Case Status
2. Latitude/Longitude
3. Altitude of the vehicle
4. Status of Hill Descent Control and Speed in
MPH (km/h)
Status Bar 2WD/4WD
1 — Uconnect Apps Button
2 — Off-Road Pages App
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Latitude/Longitude
3 — Altitude
4 — Hill Descent Control Status
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
MULTIMEDIA 271
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays
information concerning the vehicle’s transfer
case and steering angle.
The following information is displayed:
1. Status of Transfer Case
2. Status of Front Axles — If Equipped
3. Status of the Rear Axles
4. Steering angle in degrees
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD
ACCESSORY GAUGE
The Accessory Gauge page displays the current
status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil
Temperature, Oil Pressure, Transmission
Temperature, and Battery Voltage.
Accessory Gauge Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Front Axle Locker Status
3 — Steering Angle
4 — Rear Axle Locker Status
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure
4 — Transmission Temperature
5 — Battery Voltage
5
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 MULTIMEDIA
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s
current pitch (angle up and down) and roll
(angle side to side) in degrees.The Pitch & Roll
gauge provide a visualization of the current
vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD
FORWARD FACING CAMERA
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Forward
Facing Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the front view of your
vehicle. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen along with a caution note “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the
screen.
To activate, press the Forward Facing Camera
button on the touchscreen.
Forward Facing Camera Button
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
273
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability
and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during
braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are
beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice,
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when ABS activates:
The ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you
may continue to hear for a short time after
the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification
may result in degraded ABS performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 SAFETY
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning
and that service is required. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to
restore the benefits of Anti-Lock brakes. If the
ABS Warning Light does not come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD), Hill Start Assist (HSA),
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Traction Control
System (TCS). These systems work together to
enhance both vehicle stability and control in
various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer
Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control
(HDC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and amount
of brake application and then applies optimum
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the
brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefit of the system,
you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence (do not “pump” the
brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the
brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the Brake
System Warning Light does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions.
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
SAFETY 275
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by
limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is
done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to
avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear
axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel
angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of
wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions,
leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). For a complete explanation
of the available ESC modes, see Ú page 275.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability
of the vehicle under various driving conditions.
ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the
appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the above
conditions. Engine power may also be reduced
to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to flash
as soon as the ESC system becomes active.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
also flashes when the TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur.
ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs,
especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles.
The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 SAFETY
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC
system. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC
system will be in this mode. This mode should be
used for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC
also cannot prevent accidents resulting from
loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
may negatively affect the performance of the
ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
suspension, braking system, tire type and size
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance.
Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle main-
tenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury
and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
SAFETY 277
(Continued)
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes,
the push and release of the button will toggle
the ESC modes. Multiple attempts may be
required to return to "ESC On" mode.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only and should not be used on any
public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC
features are turned off. To enter the “Full Off”
mode, push and hold the ESC OFF button for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with
the engine running. After five seconds, a chime
will sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message will
display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to
“Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a
predetermined speed. When the vehicle speed
slows below the predetermined speed the
system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive
modes (if equipped).
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON
mode. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function-
ality of ESC, except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section, has
been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced
vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is
reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features are
disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 SAFETY
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction
and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
that the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come
on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON
position, the ESC system will be on even if it
was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving
while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed
while descending hills during various driving
situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by
actively controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable HDC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate
automatically if driven down a grade of
sufficient magnitude. The set speed for HDC is
selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following
summarizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but
will not activate.
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
SAFETY 279
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the
gear chosen by the transmission. When actively
controlling HDC the transmission will shift
appropriately for the driver-selected set speed
and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill
grade.
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of
the following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-
nate and remain on solid when HDC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal oper-
ating condition for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the
driver pushes the HDC switch but enable
conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when HDC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
when HDC deactivates due to overheated
brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will
activate again once the brakes have cooled
sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending
hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
driving conditions and is responsible for
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 SAFETY
(Continued)
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for
a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the trans-
mission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles
equipped with a manual transmission, if the
clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
display, see
Ú
page 90 for further information.
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see
Ú page 228 for further information.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
not a substitute for active driving involvement.
It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,
and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If so,
there may not be enough brake pressure to
hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill
when the brake pedal is released. In order to
avoid rolling down an incline while resuming
acceleration, manually activate the trailer
brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure
prior to releasing the brake pedal.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
SAFETY 281
Traction Control System (TCS)
TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected,
the TCS may apply brake pressure to the
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power
to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similarly to a limited slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a
driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will
apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine power to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
tions Ú page 200.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and
limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver
will be provided with audible and visual warn-
ings as well as a possible brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon
these progressive warnings, then the system
will provide a limited level of active braking to
help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-
ings by braking and the system determines that
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer
sway.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 SAFETY
the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake
force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required.
If an FCW with Mitigation event begins at a
speed below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system
may provide the maximum braking possible to
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the
Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated
Ú page 449.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
3 mph (5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system.
To prevent such misuse of the system, after
four Active Braking events within a key cycle,
the Active Braking portion of FCW will be
deactivated until the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
Turning FCW On or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect
display in the control settings Ú page 228.
NOTE:
When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system
to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front.
When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the
system from warning the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front. If the FCW
is set to “off”, “FCW OFF" will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own,
nor can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
SAFETY 283
When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”,
this prevents the system from providing
limited active braking, or additional brake
support if the driver is not braking adequately
in the event of a potential frontal collision.
When FCW status is set to “Warning and
Braking”, this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
The FCW system state is defaulted to “Full
On” from one ignition cycle to the next. If the
system is turned off, it will reset to “Full On”
when the vehicle is restarted.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW sensitivity and Active Braking status
are programmable through the Uconnect
system Ú page 228.
Far
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Far” setting and the system status is
“Warning and Braking”, this allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible
more distant collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings.
More cautious drivers that do not mind
frequent warnings may prefer this
setting.
Medium
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Medium” setting and the system status
is “Warning and Braking”, this allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings.
Near
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Near” setting and the system status is
“Warning and Braking”, this allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible
closer collision with the vehicle in front
using audible/visual warnings.
This setting provides less reaction time
than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that
want to avoid frequent warnings may
prefer this setting.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its
full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 SAFETY
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
S
YSTEM (TPMS)
(Vehicles Under 10K Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) Only)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a graphic showing the pres-
sure values of each tire with the low tire pres-
sure values in a different color, or the Uconnect
radio will display a TPMS message. When this
occurs you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature
by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).
This means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease.
Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed
the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven — this is normal
and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
See Ú page 406 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is
at or above the recommended cold placard
pressure. Once the low TPMS Warning Light
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure
to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than
three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi
(207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi
(186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately
23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently
low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to
rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this
situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value
Ú
page 449.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
SAFETY 285
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the Tire
Fill Alert feature the TPMS should not be used
as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your
tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using an
accurate tire pressure gauge, even if underin-
flation has not reached the level to trigger illu-
mination of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
Example: Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable.
After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 SAFETY
The TPMS consists of the following
components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster when tire pressure
is low in one or more of the four active
road tires. The instrument cluster will display a
graphic showing the pressure values of each
tire with the low tire pressure values in a
different color. An "Inflate to XX" message will
also be displayed.
Example: Low Tire Pressure Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message.
Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the instrument
cluster will return to its original color, and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System Warning Light off.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists.
If the system fault no longer exists, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will no
longer flash, and the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message will no longer display, and a pressure
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
SAFETY 287
value will display in place of the dashes. A system
fault can occur due to any of the following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices
or driving next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
Installing aftermarket window tinting that
contains materials that may block radio wave
signals.
Accumulation of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
A system fault may occur due to an incorrect
TPMS sensor location condition. When a system
fault occurs due to an incorrect TPMS sensor
location, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a “Tire Pressure Temporarily
Unavailable” message in place of the tire
pressure display screen. If the ignition switch is
cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Indicator Light will no longer flash and the
tire pressure display screen will be displayed
showing the tire pressure values in the correct
locations.
Vehicles With Non-Matching Full Size Spare Or
Compact Spare
The non-matching full size spare or compact
spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the non-matching full size spare
or compact spare tire.
If you install the non-matching full size spare
or compact spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition switch
cycle, the TPMS Warning Light and a “LOW
TIRE” message will remain on and a chime
will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
instrument cluster will still display a pressure
value in a different color and an “Inflate to
XX” message.
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the instru-
ment cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message for a minimum of
five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value.
For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a
chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will
display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the non matching full size spare or compact
spare, the TPMS will update automatically.
In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn
off and the graphic in the instrument cluster
will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of
the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 SAFETY
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TTPMS) — If Equipped
The Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TTPMS) is a feature that displays the trailer tire
pressure values and warns the driver of a low
tire pressure event based on the drivers set
target tire pressure value, through TTPMS
settings found in the radio.
The TTPMS monitors the pressure of each tire
and warns the driver through the instrument
cluster, when either a low tire pressure condition
falls below 25% of the driver’s set pressure or if a
system malfunction occurs. The instrument
cluster will display the actual tire pressure or
dashes for each of the trailer tires in the correct
trailer position, based on trailer configuration.
The TTPMS can support up to 12 trailer tires per
configured trailer on up to four configurable
trailers
Ú
page 228.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Pairing
In order use this feature, the provided tire
pressure sensors must be installed in the
desired trailer tires and the sensors must be
paired to the truck. If the target trailer requires
more than the provided four sensors, additional
sensors can be purchased at an authorized
Ram dealership.
With the sensors installed and the trailer near
or connected to your Ram truck, initiate the
pairing process by entering the settings menu in
the radio and select trailer. Select the desired
trailer profile to pair to, open the “Tire Pressure”
menu, and hit “Setup All Tires” Ú page 228.
NOTE:
The Vehicle may not be driven until the pairing
process is complete.
Trailer Tire Pressure Settings
Trailer Tire Pressure Pairing
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
SAFETY 289
Follow the on screen prompts to select the
number of axles (1 - 3), the number of trailer
tires (2, 4, 6, 8, or 12), and the set trailer tire
pressure. The range is selectable anywhere
between 25-125 psi (172-862 kPa).
Once psi (kPa) is programmed, the pairing
screen appears. Tire sensors must be paired in
order shown. Starting with Tire 1, deflate tire by
5 psi (34 kPa) and wait for a horn chirp. It may
take up to three minutes for the chirp to occur,
indicating that the sensor has paired. Repeat
process on each tire, in order, until complete.
Do not exit the pairing screen until process is
complete. If pairing was unsuccessful, a double
horn chirp will sound, and a prompt on the
touchscreen will allow you to retry the
procedure; “Retry” will only appear when setup
fails. Each tire must be successfully paired
during a single pairing process to receive the
success screen.
NOTE:
If the pairing process times out after three
minutes of no communication with a sensor, a
double horn chirp will occur indicating the
pairing has failed and a message will display on
the radio indicating the process was unsuc-
cessful. Under certain circumstances, the
double horn chirp may continue to happen
every three minutes indicating the failed
pairing. If this happens, the horn chirping may
be canceled by cycling the ignition button OFF
and then back to ON/RUN position.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Pressure
Warnings
When a low tire pressure in one or more of the
active road tires is detected, the instrument
cluster will display a message stating “Trailer
Tire Pressure Low”. The instrument cluster will
then display the TTPMS graphic showing the
pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the customer
programmed target tire pressure value as
shown at the top of the TTPMS instrument
cluster graphic. Once the tire(s) are inflated, the
system will automatically update the graphic
display in the instrument cluster, returning to its
original color. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TTPMS to receive the updated
information.
Service TTPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the instrument
cluster will display a “Trailer Tire Pressure
System Service Required” message for a
minimum of five seconds.
Once the system fault is corrected the "Trailer
Tire Pressure System Service Required" message
will no longer be displayed. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TTPMS to receive the
trailer tire pressure information.
Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured
A “Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured”
message will be displayed in the Instrument
Cluster on the TTPMS instrument cluster
graphic when a trailer number is selected that
has not had trailer tire pressure sensors paired
Ú page 228.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 SAFETY
Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active
Trailer
The “Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match
Active Trailer” message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster when the trailer sensors
being received by the TTPMS module do not
match the trailer sensors paired to the current
trailer number selected. This message will be
displayed when the sensors being received
completely match the sensors paired to another
trailer number configured in the TTPMS module.
To correct this condition, the correct trailer
number must be selected in the radio
Ú page 228.
Tire Fill Alert — If Equipped
This feature notifies the user when the placard
tire pressure is attained while inflating or
deflating the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable
the Tire Fill Alert feature through use of the
customer settings in the radio.
NOTE:
Only one tire can be filled at a time when
using the Tire Fill Alert system.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if
an existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the
system is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the TPMS
receiver module detects a change in tire
pressure. The ignition must be in the RUN
mode, with the transmission in PARK (P).
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to
enter Tire Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
If the hazard lamps do not come on while
inflating the tire, the TPMS sensor may be in a
null spot preventing the TPMS sensor signal
from being received. In this case, the vehicle
may need to be moved either forward or
backward slightly to exit the null spot.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
pressure display screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once to let the user know
when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches
recommended pressure.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
overfilled and will continue to chirp every
five seconds if the user continues to inflate
the tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough
air is let out to reach proper inflation level.
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire
is then underinflated and will continue to
chirp every five seconds if the user continues
to deflate the tire.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
SAFETY 291
Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) — If Equipped
The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an
optional feature that is included as part of the
normal Tire Fill Alert system. The system is
designed to allow the customer to select a
pressure to inflate or deflate the vehicle's front
and rear axle tires to and to provide feedback to
the customer while inflating or deflating the
vehicle's tires.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application,
which is located in the apps menu of the
Uconnect system, the customer will be able to
select a pressure setting for both the front and
rear axle tire pressures by scrolling through a
pressure range from XX to 15 psi in 1 psi
increments for each axle setting. XX = the
vehicle’s cold placard pressure values for the
front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle
placard pressure label.
The customer may also store the pressure
values chosen for each axle in the radio as a
preset pressure. The customer will be allowed
to store up to two sets of preset values in the
radio for the front and rear axle pressure values.
Once the customer selects the tire pressures for
the front and rear axles that they want to inflate
or deflate to, they can begin inflating or
deflating one tire at a time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or
deflating one tire at a time.
The system will be activated when the TPMS
receiver module detects a change in tire
pressure. The ignition must be in the RUN
mode, with the transmission in PARK (P).
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
If the hazard lamps do not come on while
inflating or deflating the tire, the TPMS sensor
may be in a null spot preventing the TPMS
sensor signal from being received. In this case,
the vehicle may need to be moved either
forward or backward slightly to exit the null spot.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
pressure display screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once when the selected
pressure is reached to let the user know
when to stop inflating or deflating the tire.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
overinflated or over deflated and will
continue to chirp every five seconds if the
user continues to inflate or deflate the tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough
air is added or removed to reach proper
selected pressure level.
Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
3500/4500/5500 Series Trucks
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire
Pressure Information System (TPIS).
The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to transmit tire
pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 SAFETY
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPIS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four TPMS sensors (Single Rear Wheel
(SRW) applications)
Six TPMS sensors (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW)
applications)
Pressure display in the instrument cluster
The TPIS system will display all four (Single Rear
Wheel (SRW) applications) or six (Dual Rear
Wheel (DRW) applications) tire pressure values
in the instrument cluster display.
If a system fault is detected, the instrument
cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the "SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be
displayed, and a pressure value will display in
place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices
or driving next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
Installing aftermarket window tinting that
contains materials that may block radio wave
signals.
Accumulation of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
SAFETY 293
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured
in the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position Ú page 312.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 312.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window.
If your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, see Ú page 445 for customer
service contact information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front
of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air
bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a
rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint
in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 SAFETY
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert
feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
SAFETY 295
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Crew Cab front
center seating position have combination lap/
shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal conditions.
However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and
reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
WARNING! (Continued)
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
WARNING! (Continued)
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SAFETY 297
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen.
To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt
if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk
of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SAFETY
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be
adjusted in the upward position without pushing
or squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull down-
ward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
First Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions (Regular Cab Only)
The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only)
features a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and
buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach
from the lower anchor when the seat is folded.
The latch plate and regular latch plate can then
be stored out of the way in the seat for added
convenience to open up utilization of the
storage areas behind the front seats when the
seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular
latch plate from its stowed position on the
seat.
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat
belt over the seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the
right head restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the mini-latch plate into the
mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instruc-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
SAFETY 299
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap
belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt.
To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the
risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack
in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular
latch plate into the center red slot on the
mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into
its stowed position.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
First Row Center Lap Belt Operating
Instructions — If Equipped
The center seating position for the Crew Cab
front seat has a lap belt only. To buckle the lap
belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a "click." To lengthen the lap belt, tilt
the latch plate and pull.
To remove slack, pull the loose end of the
webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against the
hips. Sit back and upright in the seat, then
adjust the seat belt as tightly as is comfortable.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be
used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not
required for a different occupant, it must be
removed.
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are
not properly connected when the seat belt
is used by an occupant, the seat belt will
not be able to provide proper restraint and
will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing
is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted,
follow the preceding procedure to detach
the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle,
untwist the webbing, and reattach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner — If Equipped
3500 Models Only
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
can increase the risk of serious injury or
death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt
Extender when the lap belt is not long
enough and only use in the recommended
seating positions. Remove and store the
Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
SAFETY 301
Energy Management Feature — If
Equipped
3500 Models Only
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) — If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions may be equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system
Ú page 322.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature
for each seating position.
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped with
an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough
to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as
the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 SAFETY
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect
you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits
and interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
SAFETY 303
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags — If Equipped
Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not
inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously.
A single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled.
In this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect
the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a
single chime will sound to alert you that the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 107.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a collision.
If the light does not come on as a bulb check
when the ignition is first turned on, stays on
after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 SAFETY
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag
is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
SAFETY 305
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually.
You may damage the air bags and you could
be injured because the air bags may no
longer be functional. The protective covers
for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs). If your vehicle is equipped with
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs), please refer to the information below.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs (if equipped with SABs) may help to
reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain
side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction
potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). If your vehicle is equipped with
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs), please refer to the information below.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SAFETY 307
SABICs (if equipped with SABICs) may help
reduce the risk of head and other injuries to
front and rear seat outboard occupants in
certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts
and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs (if equipped with SABICs) may help
reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of
vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain
side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) determines whether the deployment of the
Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is
appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC
in determining the appropriate response to
impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of
the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air
Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side
impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a
right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags
only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block
the deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SAFETY
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events (If Equipped With Rollover
Sensing)
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
(if equipped) are designed to activate in certain
rollover events (if equipped with rollover
sensing). The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) determines whether deployment in a
particular rollover event is appropriate, based
on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags and seat belt
pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences
a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment
is appropriate, the rollover sensing system
will deploy the Side Air Bags and seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can
be seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
SAFETY 309
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags — If Equipped
Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags
have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have
the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the
seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(if equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to place the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the
key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks
in the engine compartment and on the ground
near the engine compartment and fuel tank
before resetting the system and starting the
engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to
the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights)
after an accident, reset the system by following
the procedure described below. If you have any
doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start
after performing the reset procedure, the
vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer
to be inspected and to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System reset.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
SAFETY 311
(Continued)
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Do not modify the front fascia/bumper,
vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden-
tally or may not function properly if modifica-
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening
of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer
approved seat accessories may be used. If it
is necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 SAFETY
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child almost
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always
check the child seat Owner’s Manual to make
sure you have the correct seat for your child.
Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual
and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
SAFETY 313
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types
of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 SAFETY
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above
the forward-facing limit for the child seat should
use a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front
of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air
bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a
rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a
rear support leg in this vehicle. The floor of
this vehicle is not designed to manage the
crash forces of this type of car seat. In a
crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer,
and your child may be more severely injured
as a result.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
SAFETY 315
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no”, then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury
or death. A child must always wear both the
lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
SAFETY 317
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren.
The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor
points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located
at the back of the seat cushion where it meets
the seatback and one top tether anchorage
located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped
child seats without using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Some seating positions may have a top
tether anchorage but no lower anchorages.
In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Regular Cab LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 SAFETY
Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions Crew Cab Full Bench LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of
the LATCH system once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
SAFETY 319
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages
if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages from the outboard seating
positions?
N/A – Regular / Crew Split Rear Bench
No – Crew Full Rear Bench
Regular Cab Front/Full Bench Rear Seat: Use the seat
belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
Split Bench Rear Seat: Use the supplied center lower
anchorages to install a child restraint in the center
position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a
child seat in the center position next to a child seat using
the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for
more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every rear seating
position if they interfere with the installation of the child
restraint Ú page 38.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages — Crew
Cab Only
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Regular Cab models have tether strap
anchorages behind the front center
and right seats. Crew Cab models
have tether strap anchorages located
behind each of the rear seats.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
Crew Cab Outboard Tether Anchorage
Crew Cab Center Tether Anchorage With Head
Restraint In Raised Position
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on
each side. Each will have a hook or connector
to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to
tighten the connection to the anchorage.
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
SAFETY 321
Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a
hook at the end to attach to the top tether
anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after
it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Regular Cab or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear Seat:
No Lower Center LATCH Anchorages Available
Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat: Center LATCH
Anchorages Available
If a child restraint installed in the center
position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle
for the outboard position, do not use that
outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that
outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See Ú page 322 to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit.
If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage.
See Ú page 327 for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This posi-
tion is not approved for installing child
seats using the LATCH attachments.
You must use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center
seating position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint.
For typical installation instructions, see
Ú page 321.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. For typical
installation instructions, see
Ú
page 321.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 SAFETY
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
SAFETY 323
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with either a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching
latch plate or both. Both types of seat belts are
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seat belt
tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight
through a child restraint’s belt path.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 301 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Cinching Latch plate — Cinching Latch plate
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with
the seat belt to attach a forward facing child
restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat
belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the
child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every rear
seating position if they interfere with the installation
of the child restraint Ú page 38.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat
belt against the belt path of the child restraint?
Yes – Cinching Latch Plate
No – ALR
In positions with cinching latch plates (CINCH), the
buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not
twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
SAFETY 325
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. For Crew Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position
to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
For Regular Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. Move the vehicle seat as
far rearward as possible to keep the child as
far from the passenger air bag as possible.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This means the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to
the anchorage and tighten the tether strap.
See Ú page 327 for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing
from the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the
belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten
the lap portion around the child restraint while
you push the child restraint rearward and
downward into the vehicle seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to
the anchorage and tighten the tether strap.
See Ú page 327 for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too
close to the belt path opening of the child
restraint, you may have trouble tightening the
seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch
plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten
it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out, away from the child
restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to
complete the installation of the child restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you
shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle, turn the buckle around one
half turn, and insert the latch plate into the
buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating
position.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
SAFETY 327
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
Regular Cab Trucks:
In the regular cab truck, the top tether
anchorages are located behind the center and
right passenger seats. There is a plastic cover
over each anchorage. To attach the tether strap
of the child restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back, under the head restraint
and to the tether anchor directly behind the
seat.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path between the anchorage and the
child seat. The tether strap should go between
the head restraint posts underneath the head
restraint. You may need to adjust the head
restraint to the upward position to pass the
tether strap underneath the head restraint and
between its posts.
3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach
the hook to the square opening in the sheet
metal. Tighten the tether strap according to
the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Crew Cab Trucks
The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are
tether strap loops located between the rear
glass and the back of the rear seat. There is a
tether strap loop located behind each seating
position. Follow the steps below to attach the
tether strap of the child restraint.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
For the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle, see Ú page 317.
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger
Front Air Bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger, including
a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 SAFETY
Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach
between the rear seat and rear glass to
access the tether strap loop.
Head Restraint In Raised Position
Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In
Raised Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust
the tether strap so that it will reach over the
seat back, under the head restraint, through
the tether strap loop behind the seat and
over to the tether strap loop behind the
center seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head
restraint behind the child seat, though the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over
to the center tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
NOTE:
If there are child seats in both of the outboard
(left and right) seating positions, the tether
strap hooks of both child seats should be
connected to the center tether strap loop.
This is the correct way to tether two outboard
child seats.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
SAFETY 329
Center Seat:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach
between the rear seat and rear glass to
access the tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised
Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust
the tether strap so that it will reach over the
seat back, under the head restraint, through
the tether strap loop behind the seat and
over to the tether strap loop behind either the
right or left outboard seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head
restraint behind the child seat, though the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over
to the right or left outboard tether strap
loop.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
Installing Three Child Restraints:
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard
rear seat. Route the tether straps following
the directions for right and left seating
positions, above.
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap
loop, but do not tighten the straps yet.
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear
seat. Route the tether strap following the
directions for the center seating position,
above.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap
loop.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 SAFETY
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions,
tightening the right and left tether straps
before the center tether strap.
Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger
during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
SAFETY 331
(Continued)
(Continued)
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in ON/RUN. If the
light is either not on during starting, stays on,
or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the Air Bag System has been detected. It will
stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately Ú page 292.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed.
You should be able to feel the air directed
against the windshield. See an authorized
dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle
in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded,
or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals
and cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal
(if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 SAFETY
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold
inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped
under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
could cause a loss of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners
are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully
depress each pedal to check for interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals
then re-install the floor mats.
WARNING! (Continued)
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
SAFETY 333
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have
an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could
permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with
the engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
6
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
on the upper switch bank just below the radio.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch
Uconnect display, the Hazard Warning Flashers
switch is located above the display.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch With 12-inch Display
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 335
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning
Flashers may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles trim level, the over-
head console may vary.
Assist And SOS Buttons
Assist And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the overhead console contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber Ú page 449.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network, which
comes as a built in function. Other Uconnect
services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you’ll be connected to someone who can help.
Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle
you’re driving and its location. Additional fees
may apply for roadside assistance.
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
7
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead
console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator.
To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the
SOS call button on the overhead console or
press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off
the green LED light on the overhead console.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and
SOS buttons on the overhead console will
turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to a SOS operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open a
voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention
to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your
hands on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 337
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The overhead console light located within the
ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously
illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message: “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact an authorized dealer.”
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not
intact.
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed.
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility.
Operator error by the SOS operator.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion.
Weather.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
WARNING!
Ignoring the overhead console light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services.
If the overhead console light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the features
and applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 339
(Continued)
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service
that can immediately connect you with help in
the event that your vehicle’s airbags deploy.
Please refer to your provided radio supplement
for complete information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
4500/5500 M ODELS
These vehicles do not come equipped with a
jack.
NOTE:
Jacking and tire changing on 4500/5500 models
should be performed by an authorized dealer, or
knowledgeable service personnel with the appro-
priate heavy duty equipment, like a tire service
company.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
2. Place the gear selector into PARK.
On four-wheel drive vehicles, shift the
transfer case to the 4WD Low position.
3. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
7
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position.
For example, if the driver’s front wheel is
being changed, block the passenger’s rear
wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS 4500 A ND
5500 S
ERIES
Jack Warning Label
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 341
1. If equipped, remove the spare wheel, jack,
and tools from storage.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not
remove, the lug nuts by turning them
counterclockwise one turn while the wheel
is still on the ground.
3. When changing the front wheel, assemble
the jack driver to the jack and connect the
jack driver to the extension tube. Place the
jack under the axle as close to the tire as
possible with the jack driver extending to
the front. Connect the extension tubes and
lug wrench.
Front Jacking Locations
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the
jack driver to the jack and connect the jack
driver to the extension tubes. Securely
place the jack under the sway bar bracket
(unless both tires are flat on one side, then
place jack under shock bracket) facing for-
ward in vehicle. Connect the extension
tubes and lug wrench.
Rear Jacking Location
Before raising the wheel off the ground,
make sure that the jack will not damage
surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack
position as required.
NOTE:
If the jack will not lower by turning the dial
(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to
use the jack driver in order to lower the jack.
4. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise
the vehicle until the wheel just clears the
surface.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
7
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off.
Install the spare wheel and lug nuts with the
cone shaped end of the nuts toward the
wheel on Single Rear-Wheel (SRW) models.
On Dual Rear-Wheel models (DRW) the lug
nuts are a two-piece assembly with a flat
face. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid risk
of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
fully tighten the nuts until the vehicle has
been lowered.
6. Using the lug wrench, finish tightening
the nuts using a crisscross pattern
Ú page 432. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
7. Install wheel center cap (if equipped) and
remove wheel blocks. Do not install chrome
or aluminum wheel center caps on the
spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
If the jack will not lower by turning the dial
(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary
to use the jack driver in order to lower the
jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and tools
as previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
10. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque Ú page 432 with a torque wrench to
ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated
against the wheel.
Dual Rear Wheels
Slots in the wheels will assist in properly
orienting the inner and outer wheels. Align
these slots when assembling the wheels
for best access to the tire valve on the inner
wheel. The tires of both dual wheels must be
completely off the ground when tightening to
ensure wheel centering and maximum wheel
clamping.
Dual wheel models require a special heavy-duty
lug nut tightening adapter (included with the
vehicle) to correctly tighten the lug nuts. Also,
when it is necessary to remove and install dual
rear wheels, use a proper vehicle lifting device.
NOTE:
When installing a spare tire (if equipped) as part
of a dual rear wheel end combination, the tire
diameter of the two individual tires must be
compared. If there is a significant difference,
the larger tire should be installed in a front loca-
tion. The correct direction of rotation for dual
tire installations must also be observed.
It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept
torqued to specifications at all times. Torque
wheel stud nuts to specifications at each
lubrication interval Ú page 432.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop, could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 343
(Continued)
Wheel Nuts
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally
to eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being
sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming
elongated. This is especially important during the
first few hundred miles/kilometers of operation
to allow the wheel nuts to become properly set.
All wheel nuts should first be firmly seated
against the wheel. The wheel nuts should then
be tightened to recommended torque. Tighten
the wheel nuts to final torque in increments.
Progress around the bolt circle, tightening the
wheel nut opposite to the wheel nut just
previously tightened until final torque is achieved
Ú
page 432.
TO STOW THE FLAT OR SPARE — IF
E
QUIPPED
Refer to Upfitters Body Builder’s Guide for
information on stowing your spare tire
(if equipped).
HUB CAPS/WHEEL COVERS — IF
E
QUIPPED
The hub caps must be removed before raising
the vehicle off the ground.
For 3500 Single Rear-Wheel (SRW) models, use
the flat end of the lug wrench to hook and pull
off the hub cap. Find the opening in the hub cap,
insert the lug wrench, and pull off the cap. If you
need to pry against the wheel, protect the wheel
surface.
Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Hub Cap
On 3500 models with Dual Rear-Wheels (DRW),
you must first remove the hub caps—use the
procedure noted for the single rear wheel. For
the wheel covers (wheel skins), insert the flat
end of the lug wrench between the outer edge
of the wheel cover and the wheel. Pry against
the wheel to remove the wheel cover. Repeat
this procedure around the wheel until the cover
pops off.
Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Wheel Cover
CAUTION!
Use extreme caution when removing the front and
rear wheel covers. Damage can occur to the
center cap and/or the wheel if screwdriver type
tools are used. A pulling motion, not a pry off
motion, is recommended to remove the caps.
CAUTION!
Use a pulling motion to remove the hub
cap. Do not use a twisting motion when
removing the hub cap, damage to the hub
cap; finish may occur.
7
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replace the wheel covers using a rubber mallet
to ease the installation. Align the wheel cover
vent holes to the wheel vent holes. Tap on the
wheel cover as needed to firmly seat it evenly
around the wheel.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front
of the engine compartment, behind the left
headlight assembly.
Battery Location
If you have a diesel engine, you may have two
batteries, however jump start off the driver side
battery.
The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap if equipped. Lift up on the cap to
gain access to the positive battery post. Do not
jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive
post which has a positive (+) symbol on or
around the post.
Positive (+) Battery Post
NOTE:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK and
turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel
has two pull off notches. Make sure that the
hook of the jack handle driver is located
squarely in the cap notch before attempting
to pull off.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 345
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, apply the parking brake, and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or
either vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground.
A “ground” is an exposed metallic/
unpainted part of the engine, frame or
chassis, such as an accessory bracket or
large bolt. The ground must be away from
the battery and fuel injection system.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact.
You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
7
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Once the engine is started, follow the
disconnecting procedure below.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the
negative (-) jumper cable from the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the
positive (+) jumper cable from the
positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at an authorized dealer.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle
motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Do not connect jumper cable to any of the
fuses on the positive battery terminal. The
resulting electrical current will blow the fuse.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 347
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE — 6–SPEED
TRANSMISSION
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such
as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release
is available.
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the
access port (ringed circle) on the bottom of
the steering column, and push and hold the
override release lever up.
Gear Selector Override Access Port Location
Gear Selector Override Access Port
Engaging The Access Port
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in
NEUTRAL.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service.
7
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 – SPEED
TRANSMISSION
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such
as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release
is available.
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the Manual Park Release access
cover, which is just above the parking brake
release handle, below and to the left of the
steering column.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
4. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push
the Manual Park Release lever locking tab
(just below the middle of the lever) upwards.
Manual Park Release Pull Strap
5. While holding the locking tab in the
disengaged position, pull the tether strap to
rotate the lever rearward, until it locks in
place pointing towards the driver's seat.
Release the locking tab and verify that the
Manual Park Release lever is locked in the
released position.
6. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be
towed. Release the parking brake only when
the vehicle is securely connected to a tow
vehicle.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying
the parking brake before activating the
Manual Park Release. In addition, you should
be seated in the driver’s seat with your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake,
or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury
or death for those in or around the vehicle.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 349
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock
the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever
forward to its original position, until the
locking tab snaps into place to secure the
lever.
3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm
that the lever is locked in its stowed
position.
4. Re-install the access cover.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift
back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE
(R), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion, without
spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
For trucks equipped with an 8–speed trans-
mission, shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE
can only be achieved at wheel speeds of
5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the trans-
mission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake
pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Push the ESC OFF switch, to place the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
“Partial Off” mode, before rocking the vehicle
Ú
page 274. Once the vehicle has been freed,
push the ESC OFF switch again to restore ESC
On mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping
when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),
or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
7
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable,
disabled vehicles may also be towed as described Ú page 215.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow
must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, Ú page 348.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
2WD Models 4WD Models
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance (6–speed transmission)
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance (8–speed transmission)
Detailed instructions Ú page 215
• Auto Transmission in PARK
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly
Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 351
TWO-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (with the rear wheels on the ground)
under the following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL
Ú page 348.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed
15 miles (24 km) for 6–speed transmission,
or 30 miles (48 km) for 8–speed transmis-
sion.
If the transmission is not operable, or the
vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or farther than 15 miles (24 km) for
6–speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for
8–speed transmission, tow with the rear wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
the vehicle on a flatbed, or with the front wheels
raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly, or
(when using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer
to hold the front wheels in the straight position)
with rear wheels raised and the front wheels ON
the ground.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle
raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels
on the ground), IF the transfer case is in
NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK
Ú page 215.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe engine and/
or transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used
(if the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear
wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
7
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF
E
QUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency
tow hooks.
Emergency Tow Hooks
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk
of damage to the vehicle.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network
that takes effect in the event of an impact
Ú page 310.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle Ú page 311.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious
injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen-
gaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off-road. Do not use
tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway
towing. You could damage your vehicle.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
353
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE
ENGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
oil change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the
oil change indicator message will illuminate.
This means that service is required for your
vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Oil Change Required”
message is displayed. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change.
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage. Rotate at the
first sign of irregular wear.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, power steering and
automatic transmission (six-speed only), and
fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the maintenance plan on the following
pages for required maintenance. More frequent
maintenance may be needed in severe
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short
trip driving. In some extreme conditions,
additional maintenance not specified in the
maintenance schedule may be required.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door
hinge pivot joints twice a year to prevent prema-
ture wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated
By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before the
oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect engine cooling system protection
and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in
dusty or off-road conditions. Replace the
engine air cleaner filter, if necessary.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten termi-
nals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect automatic transmission fluid if
equipped with dipstick.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,
hoses and parking brake.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated
By Oil Change Indicator System:
Inspect front end, and lubricate — If
equipped with serviceable fittings.
Inspect and replace the Evaporative
System Fresh Air Filter as necessary,
replacement may be more frequent if
vehicle is operated in extreme dusty
conditions.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated
By Oil Change Indicator System:
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 355
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level. If using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing, change axle fluid.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace the cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Change the automatic transmission fluid (AS66RC Transmission Only).
X X X
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Change the automatic transmission fluid and sump filter
(AS66RC Transmission Only).
X X
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
X X X X X
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunc-
tion and effect vehicle handling and perfor-
mance. This could cause an accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 357
SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance plan on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
More frequent maintenance may be needed in
severe conditions, such as dusty areas and very
short trip driving. In some extreme conditions,
additional maintenance not specified in the
maintenance schedule may be required.
At Each Stop For Fuel
Check the engine oil level at least 30 minutes
after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking
the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level
reading. Add oil only when the level is at or
below the ADD or MIN mark.
Once A Month
Inspect the batteries, and clean and tighten
the terminals as required.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and automatic trans-
mission, and add as needed.
At Each Oil Change
Change the engine oil filter.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. Replace the
engine air cleaner filter, if necessary.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
Inspect front end, and lubricate — If equipped
with serviceable fittings.
Inspect and replace the Evaporative System
Fresh Air Filter as necessary, replacement
may be more frequent if vehicle is operated
in extreme dusty conditions.
Inspection and service should also be
performed anytime a malfunction is observed or
suspected. Retain all receipts.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door
hinge pivot joints twice a year to prevent prema-
ture wear.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR SYSTEM —
C
UMMINS DIESEL
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. This system will alert
you when it is time to change your engine oil by
displaying the words “Oil Change Due” in your
instrument cluster display. The oil change
reminder will remind the owner to change the
engine oil every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or
500 hours, whichever comes first, except for the
Chassis Cab models configured with optional
B20 capability that are using greater than 5%
levels of biodiesel, which are 12,500 miles
(20,000 km) or 400 hours, whichever comes
first. Failure to change the engine oil per the
maintenance schedule can result in internal
engine damage.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance
items may result in damage to the vehicle.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
is performed by someone other than an
authorized dealer Ú page 90.
Replace the engine oil and oil filter every
15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months, or
sooner if prompted by the oil change indicator
system. Under no circumstances should oil
change intervals exceed 15,000 miles
(24,000 km) or 12 months, whichever
comes first.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km)
or 12 months or 500 Hours, whichever
comes first.
Replace the engine oil and oil filter every
12,500 miles (20,000 km) or 400 hours,
whichever comes first when running greater
than 5% levels of biodiesel (Chassis Cab
models configured with optional B20 capa-
bility).
If Chassis Cab models configured with optional
B20 capability are operated with greater than
5% levels of biodiesel, the oil change interval
must not exceed 12,500 miles (20,000 km) or
400 hours, whichever comes first under any
circumstances. See the Fuel Requirements
section for more information regarding
operation with biodiesel blend (B6-B20) fuel
meeting ASTM specification D-7467.
PERFORM SERVICE INDICATOR —
C
UMMINS DIESEL
Your vehicle will require emissions maintenance
at a set interval. To help remind you when this
maintenance is due, the instrument cluster will
display “Perform Service”. When the “Perform
Service” message is displayed on the instrument
cluster it is necessary to have the emissions
maintenance performed. Emissions
maintenance may include replacing the Closed
Crankcase Ventilation (CCV) filter element.
The procedure for clearing and resetting the
“Perform Service” indicator message is located in
the appropriate Service Information.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 359
MAINTENANCE PLAN — CUMMINS DIESEL ENGINE
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114
120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
Change engine oil every
15,000 miles (24,000 km) or
12 months or 500 hours or
sooner if prompted by the oil
change indicator system,
whichever comes first.
1
X X X X X X X X X X
Additional Inspections
Check the Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF) tank, refill if necessary.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Rotate the tires. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X
Inspe
ct front end, and
lubricate — If equipped with
serviceable fittings.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Inspect engine air cleaner
filter, replace if necessary.
2
X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the front suspension,
tie rod ends and boot seals for
cracks or leaks and all parts
for damage, wear, improper
looseness or end play; replace
if necessary.
X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X X X X X X
Inspect and adjust parking
brake.
X X X X X X
Inspect drive belt; replace as
necessary.
X X X X X X
Inspect wheel bearings. X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace the cabin air filter. X X X X X X
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114
120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 361
Replace the engine fuel filter. X X X X X X X X X X
Replace the chassis mounted
fuel filter.
X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle
surfaces. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid
level. If using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road or
frequent trailer towing change
the axle fluid.
3
Inspect the transfer case fluid
(4x4), change for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing.
X X X X X
Change the transfer case fluid
(4x4).
X X
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114
120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Change automatic
transmission fluid (AS69RC
transmission only).
X X X X X
Change the automatic
transmission fluid and sump filter
(AS69RC transmission only).
X X
Change automatic
transmission fluid and filter(s)
(AS69RC transmission only).
X
Replace Crankcase Ventilation
Filter (CCV).
X X
Flush and replace power
steering fluid.
X
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114
120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 363
(Continued)
Inspection and service should also be performed
anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected.
Retain all receipts.
Flush and replace engine
coolant. ***
X
1. Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months or 500 Hours, whichever comes first.
2. Under no circumstances should the engine air cleaner filter exceed 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months, whichever comes first.
3. Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces every 20,000 miles (32,000 km). If gear oil leakage is suspected, check the fluid level. If using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or
frequent trailer towing change the axle fluid every 20,000 miles (32,000 km).
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114
120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunc-
tion and effect vehicle handling and perfor-
mance. This could cause an accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
***The manufacturer highly recommends that
all cooling system service, maintenance, and
repairs be performed by an authorized dealer.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
6.4L ENGINE
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Battery
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 7 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365
6.7L ENGINE
1 — Battery 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 8 — Battery
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Oil Dipstick 11 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
6 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 12 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end
of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is
at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the
oil level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and
should be checked for fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel
and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help
blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the
defroster for a few minutes to reduce the
possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on
the cold windshield. Windshield washer solution
used with water as directed on the container,
aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point
to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to
paint or trim.
MAINTENANCE -FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, and
periodic maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure.
This could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 367
NOTE:
Replacement batteries should both be of equal
capacity to prevent damage to the vehicle's
charging system.
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water Ú page 345.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables
on the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard
all parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection — Gasoline Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils that
are API Certified and meet the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-12633.
NOTE:
Hemi engines (6.4L) at times can tick right after
startup and then quiet down after approxi-
mately 30 seconds. This is normal and will not
harm the engine. This characteristic can be
caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the
vehicle is started then shut off after driving a
short distance. Upon restarting, you may experi-
ence a ticking sound. Other causes could be if
the vehicle is unused for an extended period of
time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or
extended idling. If the engine continues to tick
or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes
on, see the nearest authorized dealer.
Engine Oil Selection — Diesel Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils
that are API CK-4 certified and meet the
requirements of FCA US LLC. Use Mopar or an
equivalent oil meeting FCA Material Standard
MS-10902. Products meeting Cummins CES
20081 may also be used. The identification of
these engine oils are typically located on the
back of the oil container.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been
certified by the American Petroleum
Institute (API). The manufacturer only
recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
For diesel engines, oils with a high ash content
may produce damaging deposits on cylinder
head valves and/or after-treatment system
damage. A maximum sulfated ash content of
1.00 mass % is recommended for all oil used in
the engine.
The same oil change interval is to be followed
for synthetic oil as for petroleum-based oil. Also,
synthetic oil must meet the same performance
specifications as petroleum oil.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 369
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle.
Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately
discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer,
service station or governmental agency for
advice on how and where used oil and oil filters
can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should
be used for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably.
Only high quality Mopar certified filters should
be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 354.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a
high quality filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection And
Replacement — Gasoline Engine
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or
debris you should change your engine air
cleaner filter.
NOTE:
When replacing the engine air cleaner filter on
vehicles equipped with a 6.4L gasoline engine,
replace with a dry (non-oiled) filter only.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal
injury.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. With suitable tool fully loosen (six)
fasteners on engine air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to
access the engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from
the housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air
cleaner filter inspection surface facing
downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover
onto the housing assembly.
3. Tighten the fasteners (six) on the engine air
cleaner filter assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Diesel Engine
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or
debris you should change your engine air
cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Remove the screws from the engine air
cleaner filter cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Fasteners
2 — Air Hose Clamp
3 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Screws
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to
access the engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from
the housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air
cleaner filter inspection surface facing
downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover
onto the housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Install screws to secure the engine air
cleaner filter cover to the housing assembly.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is
a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an
ozone-friendly substance. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed
by the Environmental Protection Agency and
is an ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter Replacement
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 354.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove
all contents.
2. With the glove compartment door open,
remove the glove compartment tension
tether and tether clip by sliding the clip
toward the face of the glove compartment
door. Lift the clip out of glove compartment
door and release into dash panel.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin
air filter removed and the blower operating,
the blower can contact hands and may propel
dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
1 — Glove Compartment Door
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 373
3. There are travel stops on both sides of the
glove compartment. Push inward on right
side of the glove compartment travel stop to
disengage the stop. Then pull the right of
the glove compartment outward (away from
the hinge) to disengaging the right side of
the compartment from the hinge. Continue
by removing the left side from the hinge by
slightly lowering the compartment while
pulling outward until it is completely
disengaged from the hinge.
Glove Compartment
4. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the
finger tabs on each end of the filter cover.
Filter Cover
Filter Cover Removal
5. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it
straight out of the housing.
Cabin Air Filter
6. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on
the filter pointing toward the floor. When
installing the filter cover, press on each end
until you hear an audible click.
7. Reinstall the glove compartment on the
hinges.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
1 — Finger Tabs
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result
in the need to replace it more often.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
8. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall the
glove compartment past the travel stops by
pushing in on the glove compartment sides.
Glove Compartment
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully
engaged.
9. Reattach the glove compartment tension
tether by inserting the tether clip in the
glove compartment and sliding the clip
away from the face of the glove
compartment door.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt
from rib to rib, are considered normal. These
are not a reason to replace belt. However,
cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib
must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if
it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe
glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
rated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (note: identify and correct
problem before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation)
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 375
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR
F
ILTER
There are two fuel filter assemblies. One is
located on the driver's side of the engine.
The best access to this water drain valve is from
under the hood. The second one is on the under
body, located in front of the rear axle above the
drive shaft on pick-up models. The Chassis Cab
models second filter location is on the frame
behind the front axle. The best access to this
water drain valve is from under the vehicle.
If water is detected in the water separator while
the engine is running, or while the ignition
switch is in the ON position, the “Water In Fuel
Indicator Light” will illuminate and an audible
chime will be heard five times. At this point you
should stop the engine and drain the water from
both of the filters.
If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” comes on
and a single chime is heard while you are
driving, or with the ignition switch in the ON
position, there may be a problem with your
water separator wiring or sensor. See an
authorized dealer for service.
Upon proper draining of the water from both
fuel filters, the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light”
will remain illuminated for approximately
10 seconds. If the water was drained while
the engine was running, the “Water In Fuel
Indicator Light” may remain on for
approximately three minutes.
NOTE:
Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids
from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately
discarded, can present a problem to the envi-
ronment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station, or government agency for advice on
recycling programs and for where used fluids
and filters can be properly disposed of in your
area.
Drain the fuel/water separator filters when the
“Water In Fuel Indicator Light” is ON. Within
10 minutes of vehicle shutdown, turn the engine
mounted filter drain valve (located on the side of
the filter assembly) counterclockwise a quarter
turn, and turn the under body mounted filter
drain valve (located on the bottom of the filter
assembly) counterclockwise 1 full turn. Then turn
the ignition switch to the ON position, and allow
any accumulated water to drain. Leave the drain
valve open until all water and contaminants have
been removed. When clean fuel is visible, close
the drain valve following these guidelines:
1. Rotate the drain clockwise to close until
you feel resistance from the internal seal.
2. Continue turning the drain half of a turn to
properly compress the seal.
CAUTION!
Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter
when the engine is running.
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appro-
priate container.
CAUTION!
If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” remains
on, DO NOT START the engine before you
drain water from the fuel filters to avoid
engine damage.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Over-compression of the seal due to over-tight-
ening of the drain will damage the seal, cause
a leak, and require the entire sensor to be
replaced.
3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
The sensor drain should not be over-tightened
during normal service operations to avoid
internal damage and future fuel leaks.
The drain should be closed and secured
without the use of tools.
If more than a couple ounces/milliliters of fuel
have been drained, follow the directions for
“Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel”
Ú page 378
ENGINE MOUNTED FUEL FILTER
R
EPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the
manufacturer's filtration and water sepa-
rating requirements can severely impact fuel
system life and reliability.
The engine mounted filter housing is
equipped with a No-Filter-No-Run (NFNR)
feature. Engine will not run if:
a. No filter is installed.
b. Inferior/Non-approved filter is used.
Use of OEM filter is required to ensure
vehicle will run.
Engine Mounted Fuel Filter Assembly
1. Ensure engine is turned off.
2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter drain
hose.
3. Open the water drain valve a quarter turn
counterclockwise and completely drain fuel
and water into the approved container.
4. Close the water drain valve.
5. Remove lid using a socket or strap wrench.
Rotate counterclockwise for removal.
Remove used o-ring and discard it.
1 — Drain Valve
CAUTION!
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appro-
priate container.
Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a
new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris
could be introduced into the fuel filter
during this action. It is best to install the
filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to
prime the fuel system.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 377
6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the
housing and dispose of according to your
local regulations.
7. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid
and housing.
8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on
the filter housing and lubricate with clean
engine oil.
9. Remove new filter cartridge from plastic bag
and install into housing.
NOTE:
Do not remove cartridge from bag until you
reach this step in order to keep cartridge clean.
10. Push down on the cartridge to ensure it is
properly seated. Do not pre-fill the filter
housing with fuel.
11. Install lid onto housing and tighten to
22.5 ft lbs (30.5 N.m). Do not overtighten
the lid.
12. Prime the engine Ú page 378. Then start
the engine and confirm there are no leaks.
UNDERBODY MOUNTED FUEL FILTER
R
EPLACEMENT
NOTE:
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the
manufacturer's filtration and water sepa-
rating requirements can severely impact fuel
system life and reliability.
The underbody mounted filter housing will
cause the engine not to run if:
a. No filter is installed.
Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter Assembly
1. Ensure engine is turned off.
2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter drain
hose.
3. Open the water drain valve one full turn
counterclockwise and completely drain fuel
and water into the approved container.
4. Close the water drain valve.
5. Remove lid using a socket or strap wrench.
Rotate counterclockwise for removal.
Remove used o-ring and discard it.
6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the
housing and dispose of according to your
local regulations.
1 — Drain Valve
CAUTION!
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appro-
priate container.
Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a
new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris
could be introduced into the fuel filter
during this action. It is best to install the
filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to
prime the fuel system.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
7. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid
and housing.
8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on
the filter housing and lubricate with clean
engine oil.
NOTE:
Water In Fuel (WIF) sensor is re-usable. Service
kit comes with new o-ring for filter canister and
WIF sensor.
PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT
O
F FUEL
1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the
tank, approximately 2 to 5 gal (8L to 19L).
2. Three priming cycles must be completed.
Turn ignition to the RUN position and wait
approximately 30 seconds. This will activate
the in tank fuel pump. Turn the ignition
switch to the off position, and leave off for at
least 30 seconds. Repeat this procedure
three times before cranking the engine.
3. Start the engine using the “Normal Starting”
procedure Ú page 119.
4. Once the engine starts, allow the engine to
idle for a minimum of 30 seconds.
NOTE:
The engine may run rough until the air is forced
from all the fuel lines.
NOTE:
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel, meeting
ASTM specification D-975 may be used with
your Cummins diesel engine. (Chassis Cab
models not configured with B20 capability.)
A maximum blend of 20% biodiesel, meeting
ASTM specification D-7467 may be used with
your Cummins diesel engine. (Pickup models
and Chassis Cab models configured with B20
capability.)
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system
with the engine running. Engine operation
causes high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel
spray can cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not engage the starter motor for more
than 15 seconds at a time. Allow two minutes
between the cranking intervals.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel
blending agent. They can be unstable under
certain conditions and be hazardous or
explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or
gasoline, the use of these fuels can cause
damage to the fuel system.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 379
Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can
negatively impact the fuel filter's ability to
separate water from the fuel, resulting in
high pressure fuel system corrosion or
damage.
Ethanol blends are not recommended or
approved for use with your Cummins diesel
engine.
In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
tives are not necessary for the proper opera-
tion of your Cummins diesel engine.
INTERVENTION REGENERATION
S
TRATEGY — MESSAGE PROCESS FLOW
The Cummins diesel engine meets all
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Heavy
Duty Diesel Engine Emissions Standards,
resulting in one of the lowest emitting diesel
engines ever produced.
To achieve these emissions standards, your
vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art engine
and exhaust system. The engine and exhaust
after-treatment system work together to achieve
the EPA Heavy Duty Diesel Engine Emissions
Standards. These systems are seamlessly
integrated into your vehicle and managed by the
Cummins Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
The PCM manages engine combustion to allow
the exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn
Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input
or interaction on your part.
If the engine is allowed to idle or the truck is
driven on low engine speed drive cycles for more
than two hours, the system will automatically
enter an emissions operating mode that will
increase the engine idle speed to 900 RPM
(1,050 RPM for Chassis Cab). While in this mode,
which is designed to help maintain the Diesel
Particulate Filter, the engine idle speed will return
to normal when the brake pedal is applied.
A small change in engine tone or a slight change
in engine performance while accelerating may
also be noticeable at speeds below 20 mph
(32 km/h). This operating mode may last for up
to an hour of idle time, or around 20 minutes of
driving time.
Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert
you to additional maintenance required on your
truck or engine Ú page 90.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known
simply by the name of its active component,
UREA—is a key component of Selective Catalytic
Reduction (SCR) systems, which help diesel
vehicles meet stringent emission regulations.
DEF is a liquid reducing agent that reacts with
engine exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to
convert smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx)
into harmless nitrogen and water vapor
Ú page 440.
You can receive assistance in locating DEF in
the United States by calling 866-RAM-INFO
(866-726-4636). In Canada call
1–800–465–2001 (English) or
1–800–387–9983 (French)
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do not
park or operate your vehicle in areas where
your exhaust system can contact anything
that can burn.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium-based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess,
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder
Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using
the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines
or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced.
This inspection should include the following
points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm
or blade that is damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 381
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Windshield Wiper Arm And Blade
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the locking tab.
Wiper Locking Assembly
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away
from the arm and use one finger push the
release tab toward the wiper arm.
Wiper Disengaging
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the
base of the wiper arm.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
1 — Locking Tab
2 — Wiper
3 — Release Tab
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm by
holding the wiper arm with one hand and
separating the wiper blade from the wiper
arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade down toward the base of the wiper
arm and away from the J hook in the end of
the wiper arm).
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook
on the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper
locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper
assembly into the hook on the tip of the arm
through the opening in the wiper blade
under the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook
on the wiper arm until it is latched
(engagement will be accompanied by an
audible click). Fold down the latch release
tab and snap it into its locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear
of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
technician inspect the complete exhaust system
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you Ú page 333.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system.
Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 383
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However,
it is important to keep the engine properly tuned
to ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be
obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunc-
tion, particularly involving engine misfire or
other apparent loss of performance, have
your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued
operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to
overheat, resulting in possible damage to
the converter and vehicle.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radiator
or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze)
protection every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance,
the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the
A/C condenser or radiator for any accumulation
of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the A/C condenser or the back
of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks.
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 354.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 440.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protec-
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
or any “globally compatible” coolant. If a
non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant.
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant
is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze)
can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 385
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant solution. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed
in an emergency, have an authorized dealer
drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant will return to the radiator
from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery
tank (if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities
to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain
in puddles on the ground, clean up any ground
spills immediately. If ingested by a child or pet,
seek emergency assistance immediately.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Checking Coolant Level — 6.4L Engine
The level of the coolant in the pressurized
coolant bottle should be between the “MIN” and
“MAX” range on the bottle when the engine is
cold.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the cap unless
checking for coolant freeze point or replacing
engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service
attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle
need only be checked once a month. When
additional engine coolant is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
contents of the coolant expansion bottle
must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which
contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
CHARGE AIR COOLER — INTER-COOLER
The charge air cooler is positioned below the
radiator and the air conditioner condenser. Air
enters the engine through the air cleaner and
passes through the turbocharger, where it is
pressurized. This pressurized air rapidly reaches
high temperature. The air is then directed
through a hose to the charge air cooler and
through another hose to the intake manifold of
the engine. The air entering the engine has been
cooled by about 50° to 100°F (10° to 38°C).
This cooling process enables more efficient
burning of fuel resulting in fewer emissions.
To guarantee optimum performance of the
system, keep the surfaces of the charge air
cooler, condenser and radiator clean and free
of debris. Periodically check the hoses leading
to and from the charge air cooler for cracks or
loose clamps resulting in loss of pressure and
reduced engine performance.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 387
(Continued)
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically Ú page 354.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under the hood
service or immediately if the brake system
warning lamp indicates system failure.
If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the
designated marks on the side of the reservoir of the
brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of
the master cylinder area before removing cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected
to fall as the brake linings wear. However, an
unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by
a leak and a system check should be conducted.
For further information Ú page 444.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
using any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore,
do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
The only exception to this policy is the use of special
dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks in six-speed
transmissions. Avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid Ú page 444. Using the wrong
type of brake fluid can severely damage
your brake system and/or impair its perfor-
mance. The proper type of brake fluid for
your vehicle is also identified on the original
factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid
that has been in a tightly closed container.
Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap
secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open
container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or
prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid Level Check — Eight-Speed
Transmission
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required, therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid
level checked. Operating the vehicle with
an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid Level Check — Six-Speed
Transmission
It is best to check the fluid level when the
transmission is at normal operating
temperature (158-176°F / 70-80°C). This
normally occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km)
of driving. At normal operating temperature the
fluid cannot be held comfortably between the
fingertips. You can read the transmission sump
temperature in the instrument cluster screen
Ú page 90.
Use the following procedure to check the
transmission fluid level properly:
1. Monitor the transmission temperature
using the instrument cluster display, and
operate the vehicle as required to reach
the normal operating temperature. If the
transmission is not functioning properly, or
the vehicle cannot be driven, see the NOTE
and CAUTION below about checking the
fluid level at colder temperatures.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at
least 60 seconds, and leave the engine
running for the rest of this procedure.
4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the
brake pedal.
5. Place the gear selector momentarily into
each gear position (allowing time for the
transmission to fully engage in each
position), ending with the transmission in
PARK.
6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and
reinsert it until seated.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 389
7. Remove the dipstick again and note the
fluid level on both sides. The fluid level
reading is only valid if there is a solid
coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full
of fluid if the actual level is at or above the
hole. The fluid level should be between the
“HOT” (upper) reference holes on the
dipstick at normal operating temperature.
If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the
dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level.
Do not overfill. Use ONLY the specified fluid
Ú page 444. After adding any quantity of oil
through the dipstick tube, wait a minimum
of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into
the transmission before rechecking the
fluid level.
NOTE:
If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the
dipstick with the fluid at 60-70°F / 16-21°C. Only
use the COLD region of the dipstick as a rough refer-
ence when setting the fluid level after a transmis-
sion service or fluid change. Re-check the fluid level,
and adjust as required, once the transmission
reaches normal operating temperature.
8. Reinsert the dipstick. Check for leaks.
Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two COLD (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at 68-86°F / 20-30°C. Only use the
COLD region of the dipstick as a rough reference
when setting the fluid level after a transmission
service or fluid change. Re-check the fluid level, and
adjust as required, once the transmission reaches
normal operating temperature.
Fluid And Filter Changes — Eight-Speed
Transmission
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Fluid And Filter Changes — Six Speed
Transmission
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 354.
In addition, change the fluid and filters if the
fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.),
or if the transmission is disassembled for any
reason.
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C)
it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough
to produce an accurate reading. Run the
engine at idle, in PARK, to warm the fluid.
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C)
it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough
to produce an accurate reading. Run the
engine at idle, in PARK, to warm the fluid.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid
Ú
page 444. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should
be used in any transmission; only the approved
lubricant should be used.
REAR AXLE AND 4X4 FRONT DRIVING
A
XLE FLUID LEVEL
For models with 9.25 in Front Axles and 11.5 in
Rear Axles Ú page 444. For normal service,
periodic fluid level checks are not required.
When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons,
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly
should be inspected.
When checking the fluid level, the vehicle
should be in a level position. The fluid level at
room temperature should be as follows:
3500 Front Axle: ¼ inch ± ¼ inch (6.4 mm ±
6.4 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
3500 Rear Axle: ¼ inch ± ¼ inch (6.4 mm ±
6.4 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.
4500/5500 Front Axle: ¼ inch +/- ¼ inch
(6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the bottom of the fill
hole.
4500/5500 Rear Axle: 1/8 inch +/- 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm +/- 3.2 mm) below the bottom of the
fill hole.
Drain And Refill
On 4500/5500 vehicles, remove the lower bolt
to drain the axle fluid.
4500/5500 Rear Axle Plugs
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 354.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder, and (for six-speed
transmissions) will require more frequent fluid
and filter changes
Ú
page 444.
1 — 4500/5500 Rear Axle Fluid Fill Plug
2 — 4500/5500 Rear Axle Fluid Drain Plug
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 391
Lubricant Selection
For further information Ú page 444.
NOTE:
The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differ-
ential components. Operation of the vehicle in
water, as may be encountered in some
off-highway types of service, will require draining
and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials DO REQUIRE limited
slip oil additive (friction modifiers).
NOTE:
Slight noise and mild shuddering may be
evident while turning a vehicle with limited
slip differential on concrete or dry pavement.
These conditions should be considered normal
operation of the limited slip differential.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the
filler plug. The fluid level should be to the
bottom edge of the filler plug hole with the
vehicle in a level position.
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 354.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended
fluid Ú page 444.
NOISE CONTROL SYSTEM REQUIRED
M
AINTENANCE & WARRANTY
All vehicles built over 10,000 lbs. (4,535 kg) Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating and manufactured for sale
and use in the United States are required to comply
with the Federal Government's Exterior Noise
Regulations. These vehicles can be identified by
the Noise Emission Control Label located in the
operator's compartment.
Required Maintenance For Noise Control
Systems
The following maintenance services must be
performed every six months or 7,500 miles
(12,000 km) whichever comes first, to ensure
proper operation of the noise control systems.
In addition, inspection and service should be
performed anytime a malfunction is observed or
suspected. Proper maintenance of the entire
vehicle will help the effectiveness of the noise
control systems.
Exhaust System
Inspect the entire exhaust system for leaks and
damaged parts. Devices such as hangers,
clamps, and U-bolts should be tight and in good
condition. Damaged components, burned or
blown out mufflers, burned or rusted out
exhaust pipes should be replaced according to
the procedures and specifications outlined in
the appropriate service manual.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
392 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Air Cleaner Assembly
Inspect air cleaner housing for proper assembly
and fit. Make certain that the air cleaner is
properly positioned and that the cover is tight.
Check all hoses leading to the air cleaner for
tightness. The air filter element must also be
clean and serviced according to the instructions
outlined in the Scheduled Maintenance section
of this manual.
Tampering With Noise Control System
Prohibited
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the
causing thereof: (1) the removal or rendering
inoperative by any person, other than for purposes
of maintenance, repair, or replacement, of any
device or element of design incorporated into any
new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to
its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while
it is in use, or (2) the use of the vehicle after such
device or element of design has been removed or
rendered inoperative by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute
tampering are the acts listed below.
AIR CLEANER
Removal of the air cleaner.
Removal of the air cleaner filter element from
the air cleaner housing.
Removal of the air ducting.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Removal or rendering inoperative exhaust
system components including the muffler or
tailpipe.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Removal or rendering inoperative the fan
clutch.
Removal of the fan shroud.
Noise Emission Warranty
The manufacturer warrants that this vehicle as
manufactured by the manufacturer, was
designed, built and equipped to conform at the
time it left the manufacturer's control with all
applicable U.S. EPA Noise Control Regulations.
This warranty covers this vehicle as designed,
built and equipped by the manufacturer, and is
not limited to any particular part, component or
system of the vehicle manufactured by the
manufacturer. Defects in design, assembly or in
any part, component or system of the vehicle as
manufactured by the manufacturer, which, at
the time it left the manufacturer's control,
caused noise emissions to exceed Federal
standards, are covered by this warranty for the
life of the vehicle.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 393
Maintenance Log and Service Chart (Diesel Engines)
Noise Systems Maintenance Chart and Service Log — Insert Month, Day, Year under column mileage closest to the mileage at which
service was performed.
MILES 7,500 15,000 22,500 30,000 37,500 45,000 52,500 60,000
KILOMETERS 12,000 24 ,000 36,000 48,000 60,000 72,000 84,000 96,000
Exhaust
system-inspect
Air cleaner
assembly-inspect
ODOMETER
READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
MILES 67,500 75,000 82,500 90,000 97,500 105,000 112,500 120,000
KILOMETERS 108,000 120,000 132,000 144,000 156,000 168,000 180,000 192,000
Exhaust
system-inspect
Air cleaner
assembly-inspect
ODOMETER
READING
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393
394 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
Noise Systems Maintenance Chart and Service Log — Insert Month, Day, Year under column mileage closest to the mileage at which
service was performed.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 395
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This
center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses,
relays, and circuit breakers. A description of
each fuse and component may be stamped on
the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of
each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that
corresponds to the following chart.
Power Distribution Center Location
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 – – Spare
F02 60 Amp Yellow – ABS Pump Motor (HD Only)
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan – If Equipped
F04 50 Amp Red 400W Inverter – If Equipped
F05 40 Amp Green – Compressor For Air Suspension – If Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green – Steering Torque Overlay Module (STOM)
F07 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
F08 20 Amp Blue – NOX Sensor – If Equipped
F09 40 Amp Green – Diesel / Fuel Heater – If Equipped
F09 30 Amp Pink – Gas / Brake Vacuum Pump – If Equipped
F10 40 Amp Green – CBC #2 / Ext Lights
F11 40 Amp Green – Brake System Module (ECU and Valves)
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395
396 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F12 40 Amp Green – CBC #3 / Pwr Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor
F14 40 Amp Green – CBC #4 / Ext Lights
F15 30 Amp Pink – Power Side Steps — If Equipped
F16 30 Amp Pink – Smart-Bar Module – If Equipped
F17 30 Amp Pink – Winch Control Module – If Equipped
F19 30 Amp Pink – Diesel SCR Feed– If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F21 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module
F22 20 Amp Blue – Gas / ECM– If Equipped
F22 25 Amp White – Diesel PCM – If Equipped
F23 30 Amp Pink – CBC #1 / Int Light
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F26 — – Spare
F27 — – Spare
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights – If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights – If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle / Trailer Tow (Separate E-Brake) / Trailer Tow
F31 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 397
F32 – – Spare
F33 20 Amp Blue – Trans Control Module – If Equipped
F34 30 Amp Pink – Vehicle System Interface Module #2 – If Equipped
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof – If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – Electric Back Light – If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Frame / Fuel Heater #2– If Equipped
F38 30 Amp Pink – Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If Equipped
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 10 Amp Red Ventilated Seats – If Equipped
F41 – 10 Amp Red Active Grille Shutter / Active Air Dam – If Equipped
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F43 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Steering Wheel – If Equipped
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F46 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters Relay Coil – If Equipped
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 10 Amp Red IP Cluster / CSG
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module – If Equipped
F51 – 10 Amp Red
Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition Node Module, Radio Frequency
Hub Module / Electric Steering Column Lock - If Equipped
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397
398 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights - If Equipped
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Non Memory Adjustable Pedals - If Equipped
F55 – – Spare
F56 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Vapor Blocker Valve - If Equipped
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM / PCM / Solenoid Trans Pressure SW (RFE Trans Only) – If Equipped
F58 – 10 Amp Red Bed Lighting (LED) – If Equipped
F60 – — Spare
F61 – 10 Amp Red NH3 Sensor / PM Sensor – If Equipped
F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils / CAPS
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors / Powertrain Control Module / SRV – If Equipped
F65 – 10 Amp Red MOD Inverter (Wake Up) / Power Port / USB IP / WCPM – If Equipped
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof / USB Rear– If Equipped
F67 – 10 Amp Red UCI Port / USB Front
F68 – 10 Amp Red AEB RACAM HTR – If Equipped
F69 – 15 Amp Blue SCR Module 12 Volt– If Equipped
F70 – 30 Amp Green Fuel Pump Motor / K09 RLY Coil Feed – If Equipped
F71 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier / Active Noise Cancellation – If Equipped
F72 – — Spare
F73 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Transfer Pump – If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 399
F74 – 10 Amp Red Backup Alarm – If Equipped
F75 – 10 Amp Red ATMM / Coil-SCR Module RLY – If Equipped
F76 – 10 Amp Red Electronic Stability Control — If Equipped
F77 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module / Front Axle Disconnect Module / TCM/ STOM
F78 – 15 Amp Blue
Engine Control Module / Powertrain Control Module / AEB RACM MOD /
Feed To AUX PDC Relay Coils/ HRLS
F79 – 15 Amp Blue ID / Clearance Lights
F80 – 10 Amp Red Overhead Console / Assist / 911 – If Equipped
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn / Stop Lights - If Equipped
F82 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module / Cruise Control
F83 – – Spare
F84 – 15 Amp Blue ASBM / HVAC / ICS / Rear Heated Seat Switches
F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10 Amp Red
Air Suspension / ITBM / Steering Column Control Module / MOD Gateway
CAN-C Trailer TPM
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow
Power Outlet / Batt
Power Outlet / Acc
F92 – – Spare
F93 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399
400 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
F94 – 10 Amp Red
Shift-By-Wire / Transfer Case Switch / Module TPM Trailer / Module
Gateway Can-C Trailer TPM
F95 – 10 Amp Red
Rearview Camera / Park Assist / CHMSL Camera / Blind Spot Sensor /
Surround View Camera
F96 – 10 Amp Red Trailer Camera – If Equipped
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat Passenger – If Equipped
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat Driver – If Equipped
F99 – 10 Amp Red HVAC / In-Car Temperature Sensor / CSG MOD
F100 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters Box Feed– If Equipped
F101 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat Right — If Equipped
F102 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat Left / Run RLY #3 Coil — If Equipped
F103 – 10 Amp Red HeadLamp AFLS — If Equipped
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow UCI Port / USB Rear
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure
to do so may allow water to get into the
power distribution center and possibly result
in an electrical system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the
circuit that must be corrected.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 401
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
NOTE:
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
High Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 9005LL
Low & High Beam (LED Reflector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Low & High Beam (LED Projector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Turn Signal / Front Position (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 7444NA
Turn Signal (LED Projector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401
402 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Base Quad: Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Front Park And Turn — If Equipped
Low Beam
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of
the front wheel, remove the fastener, and
lift the cover over the access hole in the
front of the wheel house splash shield.
Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained
through this access hole.
Splash Shield Access Cover
Front Position (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Turn Signal (LED Reflector Headlamp) 7444NA
Front Side Marker (Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Fog Lamps (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
Front Fog Lamps (LED Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 921
Cab Roof Marker Lamps 194NA
Box Off Tail Lamps – Stop/Turn/Tail/License Plate 1157
Box Off Tail Lamps – Back Up 1156
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 403
4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel
house splash shield and disengage the bulb
access cover by rotating counterclockwise.
Bulb Access Cover
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
connector from the low beam bulb.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of
new bulb and covers.
High Beam
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
Bulb Access Cover
3. Look under the hood and behind the
headlamp to find the high beam bulb
access cover.
4. Reach behind the headlamp and disengage
the access cover by rotating counter-
clockwise.
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
connector from the high beam bulb.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of
new bulb and covers.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened
bulb life will result.
Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type
may overheat and cause damage to the
lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened
bulb life will result.
Always use the correct bulb size and type
for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or
type may overheat and cause damage to
the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp
wiring.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403
404 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Outer Park And Turn
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of
the front wheel, remove the fastener, and
lift the cover over the access hole in the
front of the wheel house splash shield.
Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained
through this access hole.
Splash Shield Access Cover
4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel
house splash shield and disengage the side
marker socket by rotating counterclockwise
a quarter turn.
Park And Turn Socket
5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from
the housing.
6. Separate the bulb from the socket without
twisting.
7. Reverse the procedure for installation of
new bulb and covers.
Fog Lamps — If Equipped
Halogen
See below steps to replace:
1. Reach under and behind the front fascia/
bumper to access the back of the front fog
lamp housing.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness
connector from the fog lamp bulb.
Fog Lamp Bulb
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
5. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb
and cover.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 405
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) With
Cargo Lamp
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the two screws holding the
housing/lens to the body as shown.
CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations
2. Separate the connector holding the housing
and wiring harness to the body.
CHMSL Connector Location
3. Turn the desired bulb socket a quarter turn and
remove the socket and bulb from housing.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.
Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of
bulbs and housing.
Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the two screws from the top of the
lamp.
Removing Rear Screw From Clearance Lamp
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb
life will result.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb
life will result.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405
406 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Rotate the bulb socket a quarter turn and
pull it from the lamp assembly.
Removing Bulb Socket From Clearance Lamp
3. Pull the bulb straight from it's socket and
replace.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 406
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 407
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 407
408 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 408
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 409
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 409
410 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 410
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 411
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard Ú page 199.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 411
412 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight
(if applicable) should never exceed the weight
referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and
towing capacities of your vehicle with varying
seating configurations and number and size
of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 412
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 413
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 413
414 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping
distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 414
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 415
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining
correct tire inflation pressure is very important.
Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle
operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer
or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the valve stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You
could have a serious collision. Do not drive a
vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at
continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 415
416 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and Speed
Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as
it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed
after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not
designed to be reused when driven under Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the Run Flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision.
Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 416
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 417
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends
that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size,
quality and performance when replacement is
needed
Ú
page 417. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load
Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found
on the original equipment tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 406.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 417
418 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications
or capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 418
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 419
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance
on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or
dry surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should
be checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 206.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 419
420 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary
emergency use only. You can identify if your
vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 420
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 421
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives
or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel
cleaners and automatic car washes may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 421
422 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following snow traction devices are
recommended. Follow these recommendations
to guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size
for the tire, as recommended by the snow
traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recom-
mended tire size, axle and snow traction
device:
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
3500 SRW CAB CHASSIS
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
4x2
4x4
Rear LT275/70R18E U Class
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 422
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 423
3500 DRW CAB CHASSIS
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
4x2 Rear
LT235/80R17E U Class
4x4 Front/Rear
4500/5500 DRW CAB CHASSIS
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond
tire profile or equivalent)
4x2
Rear 225/70R19.5G U Class
4x4
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type
(M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles
can cause unpredictable handling. You could
lose control and have a collision.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 423
424 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions.
For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú
page 354.
More frequent rotation is permissible if desired.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
NOTE:
On Canadian vehicles only, if your vehicle is
equipped with All-Season type tires on the front
and On/Off Road type tires mounted on the
rear, do not use a front to back rotation pattern.
Instead, rotate your tires side to side at the
recommended intervals.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about 0.5 mile
(0.8 km). Autosock devices do not require
retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 424
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 425
(Continued)
Dual Rear Wheels
Tire Rotation
The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should
be matched for wear to prevent overloading one
tire in a set. To check if tires are even, lay a
straight edge across all four tires. The straight
edge should touch all the tires.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Information System (TPIS):
The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
uses unique sensors in the inner rear wheels
to help identify them from the outer rear
wheels, because of this, the inner and outer
wheel locations can’t be switched.
After a tire rotation is completed, as shown
below, the system can auto learn the locations
of each sensor ID. Auto learning/localization
occurs when the vehicle ignition status is
changed from Off to On and speeds of greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h) are obtained and remain
over 5 mph (8 km/h) for at about a 15 minute
period. You may need to drive for 20 minutes
to account slower speeds and stops.
If the tires are rotated incorrectly, the Auto
localization of the TPIS sensors will fail to
locate correctly resulting in incorrect loca-
tions for the pressure values displayed in the
Instrument Cluster.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
4500/5500 Dual Rear Tires may only have
one approved direction of rotation. This is
to accommodate the asymmetrical design
(tread pattern) of the On/Off road tire.
When replacing a flat, the spare tire may
have to be remounted on the rim or
installed at a different location to maintain
the correct placement of the tire on the
wheel relative to the tire/wheel position on
the vehicle. For example, if the spare is
used to replace an outer rear tire it will have
to be remounted on the rim so that the
wheel is dished inward. That way the tread
design of asymmetrical tires will maintain
proper position.
CAUTION! (Continued)
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 425
426 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well
on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level
of performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel,
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 426
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 427
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than
three weeks, we recommend that you take the
following steps to minimize the drain on your
vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for
about five minutes in the fresh air and high
blower setting. This will ensure adequate
system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 427
428 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish.
Use precautions to not scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 428
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 429
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the
following manner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by
blotting with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp
towel.
For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or
a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth
and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other
form of protectants on Stain Repel products.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners.
This will weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
NOTE:
If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper
turning loop for soiling. If soiling is present,
clean with a wet soft cloth until all residue is
removed.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a
soft cloth.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 429
430 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and
damage the leather upholstery and should be
removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and
Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid.
Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based
cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather upholstery, as damage to the
upholstery may result.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 430
431
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of
the instrument panel, visible through the
windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with
the engine off), the brakes will still function.
However, you will experience a substantial
increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses
normal braking capability, the remaining system
will still function with some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. This will be evident by increased
pedal travel during application, greater pedal
force required to slow or stop, and activation of
the “Brake Warning Light” and/or the “ABS
Warning Light” during brake use.
HYDRAULIC BRAKE ASSIST — IF
E
QUIPPED
The brake system power assist is provided by a
hydro-boost unit which shares fluid with the
power steering system. You may experience
some clicking or hissing noises from the
hydro-boost system during hard braking
conditions.
NOTE:
Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be
higher than normal until the power steering fluid
reaches operating temperature.
9
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 431
432 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a six sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or
oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
NOTE:
Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted.
The lug nuts are a two-piece assembly. When
the tires are being rotated or replaced, clean
these lug nuts and add two drops of oil at the
interface between the hex and the washer.
Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the
lug nut/bolt (do not insert it half way).
Oil Interface Location
Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence
to the torques listed in the table. Go through the
sequence a second time to verify that specific
torque has been achieved. Retighten to
specifications after 25 miles (40 km) and check
the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug
nuts/bolts are properly tightened.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
Lug
Nut/Bolt
Type
**Lug
Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
120-150
Ft-Lbs
(160-200 N·m)
Cone
M14 x
1.50
22 mm
130-160
Ft-Lbs
(190-220 N·m)
Flanged
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 432
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 433
8/10 Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Patterns
It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept
torqued to specifications at all times. Torque
wheel stud nuts to specifications at each
lubrication interval.
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally
to eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being
sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming
elongated. This is especially important during the
first few hundred miles/kilometers of operation
to allow the wheel nuts to become properly set.
All wheel nuts should first be firmly seated
against the wheel. The wheel nuts should then be
tightened to recommended torque. Tighten the
wheel nuts to final torque in increments.
Progress around the bolt circle, tightening the
wheel nut opposite to the wheel nut just
previously tightened until final torque is
achieved.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and
may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
6.4L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high quality
unleaded gasoline having a posted octane number
of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
1 — 10 Bolt Pattern
2 — 8 Bolt Pattern
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
9
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 433
434 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level
of detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 434
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 435
(Continued)
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the engine,
emissions, and fuel system components.
Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and
may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer
recommends that gasoline without MMT be used
in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may
not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore,
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the
gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in
Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
9
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 435
436 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable
supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires
that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low
Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur
maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur
Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum)
to avoid damage to the emissions control
system.
For most year-round service, Number 2 diesel
fuel meeting ASTM (formerly known as the
American Society for Testing and Materials)
specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide
good performance. If the vehicle is exposed
to extreme cold (below 20°F or -7°C), or is
required to operate at colder-than-normal
conditions for prolonged periods, use climatized
Number 2 diesel fuel or dilute the Number 2
diesel fuel with 50% Number 1 diesel fuel. This
will provide better protection from fuel gelling or
wax-plugging of the fuel filters.
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water.
To prevent fuel system trouble, drain the
accumulated water from the fuel/water
separator using the fuel/water separator drain
provided on both fuel filters. If you buy good
quality fuel and follow the cold weather advice
above, fuel conditioners should not be required
in your vehicle. If available in your area, a high
cetane “premium” diesel fuel may offer improved
cold-starting and warm-up performance.
FUEL SPECIFICATIONS
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine has been
developed to take advantage of the high energy
content and generally lower cost Number 2
Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel or Number 2 Ultra
Low Sulfur climatized diesel fuels. Experience
has shown that it also operates on Number 1
Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuels or other fuels
within specification.
NOTE:
If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gaso-
line on your diesel vehicle, Do not start the
vehicle. If you restart your vehicle you risk
damaging the engine and fuel system. Please
call an authorized dealer for service.
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting
ASTM specification D-975 may be used with
your Cummins diesel engine. (Chassis Cab
models not configured with B20 capability).
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel
blending agent. They can be unstable under
certain conditions and hazardous or
explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains
on, DO NOT START engine before you drain
the water from the fuel filter(s) to avoid
engine damage Ú page 375.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 436
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 437
In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
tives are not necessary for the proper opera-
tion of your Cummins diesel engine. However,
if seasonably adjusted fuel is not available and
you are operating below 20°F (-6°C), Mopar
Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent)
may be beneficial to avoid fuel gelling.
Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should
only be used where extended arctic condi-
tions (0°F or -18°C) exist.
BIODIESEL FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Chassis Cab Models
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting
ASTM specification D975 may be used with
your Cummins diesel engine. If operation with
biodiesel blends greater than 5% but not
greater than 20% (B6-B20) is desired, the truck
must first be reconfigured by an authorized
Ram dealer and the provisions in the following
section must be adhered to.
Pickup Models And Chassis Cab Models
Ordered With B20 Option
Your vehicle has been validated and approved
for the use of biodiesel in blends up to 20%
(B20) provided that you comply with the
requirements outlined below. It is important
that you understand and comply with these
requirements. Failure to comply with Oil Change
requirements for vehicles operating on
biodiesel blends up to B20 will result in
premature engine wear. Such wear is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable
resources typically derived from animal fat,
rapeseed oil (Rapeseed Methyl Ester (RME)
base), or soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester (SME or
SOME) base). Biodiesel fuel has inherent
limitations which require that you understand
and adhere to the following requirements if you
use blends of biodiesel greater then 5% but not
greater than 20% (B6-B20). There are no
unique restrictions for the use of B5. Use of
blends greater than 20% is not approved. Use of
blends greater than 20% can result in engine
damage. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM
Standards
The quality of biodiesel fuel may vary widely.
Only fuel produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the
following specifications may be blended to
meet biodiesel blend (B6–B20) fuel meeting
ASTM specification D-7467:
Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification
D-975 and biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting
ASTM specification D-6751.
Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel
Within Six Months Of Manufacture
Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which
can result in long term storage problems. Fuel
produced to approved ASTM standards, if
stored properly, provides for protection against
fuel oxidation for up to six months.
9
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 437
438 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel Water Separation — Must Use Mopar/
Cummins Approved Fuel Filter Elements
You must use Mopar/Cummins approved fuel
filter elements in both your engine mounted
filter and frame mounted filter.
Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and
water accelerates microbial growth. Your
Mopar/Cummins filtration system is designed
to provide adequate fuel water separation
capabilities.
Bio-Diesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient
Temperatures
Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient
temperatures, which may pose problems for
both storage and operation. Precautions can be
necessary at low ambient temperatures, such
as storing the fuel in a heated building or a
heated storage tank, or using cold temperature
additives.
Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To
Required Oil Change Interval
Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been observed
with the use of biodiesel fuel. Fuel in oil must not
exceed 5%. To ensure this limit is met your oil
change interval must be maintained to the
following schedule:
Ram 3500/4500/5500 Chassis
Cab — 12,500 Miles (20,000 km)*
(*unless otherwise notified with a oil service
message)
CAUTION!
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 12,500 miles (20,000 km)
if operation occurs with greater than 5%
biodiesel blends. Oil change intervals should
not exceed six months in either case. Failure
to comply with these Oil Change require-
ments for vehicles operating on biodiesel
blends up to B20 may result in premature
engine wear. Such wear is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
B20 Biodiesel capable: The engine may
suffer severe damage if operated with
concentrations of Biodiesel higher than
20%.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 438
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 439
FLUID CAPACITIES
6.4L GASOLINE ENGINE
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Standard Rear Tank 52 Gallons 197 Liters
Optional Midship Tank 22 Gallons 83 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
6.4L Engine 16.6 Quarts 15.7 Liters
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Standard Rear Tank 52 Gallons 197 Liters
Optional Midship Tank 22 Gallons 83 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank (Approximate) 8.7 Gallons 33 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
6.7L Turbo Diesel Engine 12 Quarts 11.4 Liters
9
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 439
440 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
6.4L GASOLINE ENGINE
Cooling System
6.7L Engine Chassis Cab 3500/4500 with AS69RC 22.3 Quarts 21.1 Liters
6.7L Engine Chassis Cab 5500 with AS69RC 22.8 Quarts 21.6 Liters
US Metric
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10–Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 6.4L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum
Institute (API) categories of SN. The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra
0W-40 or equivalent Mopar engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter – 6.4L Engine
We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar Engine Oil Filter is unavailable
only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection – 6.4L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 440
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 441
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil
In ambient temperatures above 0°F (-18°C), we recommend you use 10W-30 engine oil such
as Mopar, Shell Rotella and Shell Rimula that meets FCA Material Standard MS-10902 and the
API CK-4 engine oil category is required. Products meeting Cummins CES 20081 may also be
used. The identification of these engine oils is typically located on the back of the oil container.
In ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), we recommend you use 5W-40 synthetic engine
oil such as Mopar, Shell Rotella and Shell Rimula that meets FCA Material Standard MS-10902
and the API CK-4 engine oil category is required.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar Engine Oil Filter is unavailable
only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Filters
We recommend you use Mopar Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating (engine mounted filter).
Must meet 5 micron rating (chassis mounted filter). Using a fuel filter that does not meet the
manufacturer’s filtration and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel system
life and reliability.
Crankcase Ventilation Filter We recommend you use Mopar CCV Filter.
9
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 441
442 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel Selection
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires that
you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum)
and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid
damage to the emissions control system.
For most year-round service, Number 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade
S15 will provide good performance.
If climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD fuel is not available, and you are operating below
(20°F/-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions, Mopar Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or
equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling.
This vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM
specification D-975. Pickup models, and Chassis Cab models configured with optional B20
capability, are additionally compatible with 20% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-7467.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Mopar Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that has been API Certified to
the ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system
damage. You can receive assistance in locating DEF in the United States by calling
866-RAM-INFO (866-726-4636). In Canada call 1–800–465–2001 (English) or
1–800–387–9983 (French).
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 442
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 443
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
9
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 443
444 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
6.4L GASOLINE ENGINE
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – Eight-Speed
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use
the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Automatic Transmission – Six-Speed
Use only Mopar ASRC Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the proper
fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend you use Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant for Borg Warner 44-44 and 44-45.
Front and Rear Axle Fluid
We recommend you use SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant. Limited slip
additive is required for limited slip axles.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703.
Power Steering Reservoir
We recommend you use Mopar Power Steering Fluid +4, Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Only use Mopar ASRC Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the proper
fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend you use Mopar BW44–44 Transfer Case Fluid.
Front and Rear Axle Fluid
We recommend you use SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant. Limited slip
additive is required for limited slip axles.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 444
445
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with
the service manager. Keep a maintenance log
of your vehicle's service history. This can often
provide a clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation
with the service advisor and list the items in order of
priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain
a rental vehicle (additional charges may apply).
If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these
arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to
be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have
the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer’s service manager first.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance. If an authorized dealer is
unable to resolve the concern, you may contact
the FCA US LLC's Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
10
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 445
446 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC C USTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, FCA US LLC has installed special
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with the
FCA US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the FCA US LLC’s Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 446
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 447
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle.
An authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle to keep it operating at its best and
maintain its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON , D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
10
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 447
448 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to
http://www.safercar.gov
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from
http://www.safercar.gov
.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety
defect, you should contact the Customer
Service Department immediately. Canadian
customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should
contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle
Defect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/
Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP
.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
a complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These manuals make it easy to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all
tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s
Information, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US)
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 448
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 449
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
10
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 449
450
INDEX
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
............................................................260
WARRANTY INFORMATION ......................447
A
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control)
.................................... 164 , 166
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............384
Adding Fuel ....................................................196
Additives, Fuel ...............................................434
Adjust
Down
...........................................................35
Forward ....................................................... 35
Rearward..................................................... 35
Up................................................................ 35
Adjustable Pedals ............................................40
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................266
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation
......................................305
Air Bag Warning Light ................................303
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 310, 352
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................352
If Deployment Occurs ................................309
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................305
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............311
Maintenance .............................................311
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............. 303
Transporting Pets ..................................... 330
Air Bag Light................................ 107 , 303, 331
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter)
................................................... 369 , 391
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 371
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 371 , 372
Air Conditioner System ................................. 371
Air Conditioning ................................................62
Air Conditioning Filter .......................................65
Air Conditioning System ...................................64
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................65
Air Filter ........................................................ 369
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 415
Alarm
Security Alarm
....................................23 , 108
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.........................................................10
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......................... 384
Capacities................................................. 439
Disposal ................................................... 385
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 273
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 113
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 280
Audio Settings ............................................... 253
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 220
Auto Down Power Windows ..............................77
Automatic Door Locks ......................................28
Automatic Headlights .......................................52
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............64
Automatic Transmission ....................... 141 , 389
Adding Fluid .............................................. 389
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 389
Fluid Change ............................................. 389
Fluid Level Check .............................387 , 388
Fluid Type ........................................ 390 , 444
Shifting ..................................................... 146
Special Additives ...................................... 387
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ... 145
AutoPark ....................................................... 120
AUX Camera ......................................... 188 , 194
Auxiliary Driving Systems .............................. 281
Axle Fluid.....................................390 , 391, 444
Axle Lubrication ................................... 390 , 391
B
Back-Up
......................................................... 186
Back-Up Camera ........................................... 186
Battery ................................................. 108 , 366
Blanket ..................................................... 130
Charging System Light .............................. 108
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................16
Battery Saver Feature ......................................54
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 450
451
Belts, Seat
.....................................................330
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing
................262
Body Builders Guide ........................................ 10
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................380
B-Pillar Location .............................................411
Brake Assist System ......................................274
Brake Control System ....................................274
Brake Fluid .......................................... 387 , 444
Brake System ...................................... 387 , 431
Fluid Check ...............................................387
Master Cylinder .........................................387
Parking ......................................................137
Warning Light ............................................107
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................141
Bulb Replacement .........................................401
Bulbs, Light .......................................... 332 , 401
C
Cab Top Clearance Lights ..............................405
Camera ..........................................................186
Camera, AUX ........................................ 188 , 194
Camera, Rear ...................................... 186 , 189
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .........439
Capacities, Fluid ............................................439
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ................................................364
Power Steering ..........................................163
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................385
Car Washes................................................... 428
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................ 333
Cargo Light.......................................................54
CD................................................................. 255
Cellular Phone .............................................. 269
Center High Mounted Stop Light ................... 405
Center Seat Storage Compartment ..................67
Changing A Flat Tire ...................................... 339
Charge Air Cooler .......................................... 386
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 407
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light) .............................................. 117
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 330
Checks, Safety .............................................. 330
Child Restraint .............................................. 312
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ........................................... 315
Child Seat Installation ..................... 323 , 325
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 322
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 313
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 320
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 317
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 314
Seating Positions ...................................... 316
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 433
Cleaning
Wheels ..................................................... 421
Climate Control ................................................58
Automatic ....................................................59
Manual ........................................................62
Cold Weather Operation ................................ 122
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 419
Contract, Service ........................................... 446
Controls ........................................................ 247
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 385
Cooling System ............................................. 383
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 384
Coolant Level ................................... 384 , 386
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 439
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 385
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 384
Inspection ................................................. 386
Points To Remember ................................ 386
Pressure Cap ............................................ 385
Radiator Cap ............................................. 385
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .....384, 440
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 427
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ............. 164 , 166
Cruise Light ................................................... 115
Customer Assistance .................................... 445
Cybersecurity ................................................ 220
D
Daytime Running Lights
...................................51
Dealer Service ............................................... 367
Defroster, Rear Window ...................................62
Defroster, Windshield ............................ 62 , 331
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..............................57
Deleting A Phone ........................................... 262
Diagnostic System, Onboard ......................... 116
11
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 451
452
Diesel Exhaust Brake
....................................138
Diesel Fuel .....................................................436
Diesel Fuel Requirements .............................436
Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming .....................378
Differential, Limited Slip ................................162
Dipsticks
Power Steering ..........................................163
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................................350
Disc Drive ......................................................255
Disconnecting ................................................262
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......................385
Disturb...........................................................265
Door Ajar........................................................110
Door Ajar Light ...............................................110
Door Locks
Automatic .................................................... 28
Doors ............................................................... 24
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter ............375
Driver Memory Presets ..................................253
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 33
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water
....................................................218
Dual Rear Wheels ....................... 342 , 425, 432
E
Electric Brake Control System .......................274
Anti-Lock Brake System .............................273
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 275 , 281
Electrical Power Outlets ...................................73
Electronic Range Select (ERS) ............. 145, 150
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 275
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...... 109
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case .... 153, 156
Emergency Braking ....................................... 137
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck
..................... 349
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 334
Jacking ..................................................... 339
Jump Starting ........................................... 344
Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 117
Engine.................................................. 364 , 365
Air Cleaner ................................................ 369
Block Heater ............................................. 125
Break-In Recommendations ............ 136, 137
Compartment ........................................... 365
Compartment Identification ...................... 364
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 440
Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 333
Fails To Start ............................................ 121
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 121
Fuel Requirements ................................... 433
Identification ............................................ 365
Idling ........................................................ 131
Jump Starting ........................................... 344
Oil .................................................... 368 , 440
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 364
Oil Filter .................................................... 369
Oil Reset ......................................................91
Oil Selection.............................................. 368
Oil Synthetic .............................................. 368
Overheating .............................................. 346
Runaway ................................................... 195
Starting ..................................................... 119
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature
................................................ 310 , 352
Entry System, Illuminated ................................56
Ethanol.......................................................... 434
Exhaust Brake ............................................... 138
Exhaust Gas Cautions ................................... 333
Exhaust System ..........................333 , 382, 391
Exterior Lighting ...............................................50
Exterior Lights ........................................ 50 , 332
F
Filters
Air Cleaner
................................................ 369
Air Conditioning ................................. 65 , 372
Engine Fuel ......................................375 , 440
Engine Oil ........................................ 369 , 440
Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 369
Flashers
Turn Signals
.............................. 54 , 115, 332
Flash-To-Pass ...................................................52
Flat Tire Stowage .......................................... 343
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 439
Fluid Leaks.................................................... 332
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 452
453
Fluid Level Checks
Brake
........................................................387
Power Steering ..........................................163
Fog Lights ...............................................53 , 404
Fold Flat Load Floor ......................................... 70
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 33
Forward Collision Warning .............................281
Four Wheel Drive ...........................................153
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...............................334
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................349
Front Axle (Differential) ..................................390
Fuel ............................................ 196 , 433, 436
Adding .......................................................195
Additives ...................................................434
Clean Air ....................................................433
Diesel .............................................. 196 , 436
Ethanol ......................................................434
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...................................196
Filter ................................................ 375 , 440
Gasoline ....................................................433
Light ..........................................................111
Materials Added ........................................434
Methanol ...................................................434
Octane Rating ...........................................433
Requirements ................................. 433 , 436
Specifications ............................................436
Tank Capacity ............................................439
Fuses .............................................................394
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....................47
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .............................. 196
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................ 433
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 433
Gauges
Voltage ..................................................... 128
Gear Ranges ................................................. 147
Gear Selector Override ................................. 347
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 430
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 201
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 201
Guide
Body Builders ..............................................10
GVWR............................................................ 199
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
.................................... 218
Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 334
Head Restraints ...............................................38
Head Rests ......................................................38
Headlights .................................................... 402
Automatic High Beam ..................................52
Cleaning ................................................... 427
High Beam ...................................................51
Lights On Reminder .....................................53
Passing ........................................................52
Switch..........................................................50
Heated Mirrors .................................................46
Heated Seats ...................................................37
Hill Descent Control ...................................... 278
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 278
Hill Start Assist .............................................. 280
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 204
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................47
Hood Prop ........................................................79
Hood Release ...................................................79
Hub Caps ...................................................... 343
I
Idle-Up Feature ............................................. 132
Ignition .............................................................18
Switch ..........................................................18
Illuminated Entry ..............................................56
Inside Rearview Mirror .................... 41 , 42, 335
Instrument Cluster ......................85 , 86, 88, 89
Descriptions.............................................. 115
Display .........................................................90
Engine Oil Reset ..........................................91
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 429
Integrated Trailer Brake Control .................... 207
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 428
Interior Lights ...................................................55
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................57
Intervention Regeneration Strategy ..... 101, 379
Inverter Outlet (115V) ......................................74
11
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 453
454
J
Jack Location
.................................................339
Jack Operation ...............................................339
Jacking And Tire Changing .............................339
Jump Starting ................................................344
K
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs
.............. 17
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote
Keyless Entry)
..................................................16
Key Fob Programming (Remote
Keyless Entry)
..................................................17
Keyless Enter-N-Go ........................26 , 118, 123
Passive Entry ............................................... 26
Keys.................................................................15
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals
........................ 54
Lane Change Assist ......................................... 54
LaneSense ....................................................183
Latches..........................................................332
Hood ...........................................................79
Lead Free Gasoline ........................................433
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................332
Life Of Tires ...................................................417
Light Bulbs........................................... 332 , 401
Lights ............................................................ 332
Air Bag .................................... 107 , 303, 331
Automatic High Beam ..................................52
Brake Assist Warning ............................... 277
Brake Warning .......................................... 107
Bulb Replacement .................................... 401
Cab Top Clearance ................................... 405
Cargo ...........................................................54
Center Mounted Stop ............................... 405
Courtesy/Reading .......................................55
Cruise ....................................................... 115
Daytime Running .........................................51
Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Indicator ............................................... 108
Exterior ...............................................50 , 332
Fog ........................................................... 404
Four Wheel Drive Indicator ....................... 162
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 334
Headlights ............................................50 , 52
High Beam ...................................................51
Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 278
Illuminated Entry .........................................56
Interior.........................................................55
Lights On Reminder .....................................53
Low Fuel ................................................... 111
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ....... 110
Park .......................................................... 115
Passing ........................................................52
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 107
Security Alarm .......................................... 108
Service...................................................... 401
Traction Control ........................................ 277
Transfer Case ........................................... 162
Turn Signals .....................54, 115, 332, 402
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
................................108 , 115
Limited-Slip Differential ....................... 162 , 391
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ..................... 105
Load Shed Battery Saver On ......................... 105
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ........... 105
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............ 105
Loading Vehicle ............................................. 199
Tires.......................................................... 411
Locks
Automatic Door ............................................28
Child Protection ...........................................28
Power Door ..................................................25
Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 284
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 380
Lug Nuts/Bolts .....................................342 , 432
M
Maintenance Free Battery
............................ 366
Maintenance Plan ......................................... 359
Maintenance Schedule ...............353, 357, 359
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .. 110
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 454
455
Manual
Park Release
.............................................348
Service ......................................................448
Media Hub ....................................................... 72
Media Mode ..................................................255
Memory Seat ................................................... 32
Memory Settings ............................................. 32
Methanol .......................................................434
Mirrors ............................................................. 41
Electric Powered ......................................... 44
Heated ........................................................ 46
Memory ....................................................... 32
Outside........................................................ 44
Rearview .....................................41 , 42, 335
Trailer Towing .............................................. 46
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle ........................................................ 10
Monitor, Tire Pressure System .......................284
Mopar Parts ...................................................447
MP3 Control .................................................... 72
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................ 51
N
Navigation System (Uconnect GPS)
...............186
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 136 , 137
Noise Control
Maintenance
.............................................391
Tampering Prohibited ................................392
Noise Emission Warranty ..................... 391 , 392
O
Occupant Restraints ..................................... 292
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..................... 433
Oil Change Indicator ..................................... 357
Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 369
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 369
Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 108
Oil Reset ..........................................................91
Oil, Engine............................................ 368 , 440
Capacity.................................................... 439
Dipstick .................................................... 366
Disposal ................................................... 369
Filter ................................................ 369 , 440
Filter Disposal ........................................... 369
Identification Logo .................................... 368
Materials Added To .................................. 368
Pressure Warning Light ............................ 108
Recommendation ..................................... 368
Synthetic .................................................. 368
Onboard Diagnostic System .......................... 116
Operating Precautions .................................. 116
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual
........................................ 448
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................44
Overdrive ...................................................... 151
Overdrive OFF Switch .................................... 151
Overheating, Engine ...................................... 346
P
Paint Care ..................................................... 427
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone .................................................... 260
Parking Brake ............................................... 137
ParkSense System, Rear ............................... 177
Passive Entry....................................................26
Pedals, Adjustable ...........................................40
Pets............................................................... 330
Phone Mode .................................................. 258
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 411
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses)
....................... 395
Door Locks...................................................25
Mirrors .........................................................44
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........73, 74
Seats ...........................................................35
Sliding Rear Window ....................................78
Steering ............................................. 44 , 163
Take-Off Adapter ....................................... 163
Take-Off Operation .................................... 163
Windows ......................................................76
Power Seats
Down ...........................................................35
Forward .......................................................35
Rearward .....................................................35
Recline.........................................................35
Tilt................................................................35
Up ................................................................35
11
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 455
456
Power Steering Fluid
......................................444
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...................300
Preparation For Jacking .................................339
Presets ..........................................................253
PTO (Power Take-Off) .....................................163
R
Radial Ply Tires
..............................................416
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .. 384, 385
Radio
Presets
......................................................253
Radio Controls ...............................................247
Radio Mode ...................................................247
Radio Operation .................................. 247 , 269
Radio Remote Controls ..................................247
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........................... 58
Rear Axle (Differential) ......................... 390 , 391
Rear Camera .................................................189
Rear ParkSense System ................................177
Rear Window, Sliding ....................................... 78
Recreational Towing ......................................214
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....216
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..217
Reformulated Gasoline ..................................433
Refrigerant ....................................................372
Release, Hood ................................................. 79
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................294
Remote Keyless Entry ...................................... 15
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 17
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .........247
Remote Start (Diesel) ......................................22
Remote Start (Gasoline) ..................................20
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ..............................21
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 401
Replacement Tires ........................................ 417
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 447
Resetting Perform Service Indicator ............. 358
Restraints, Child ........................................... 312
Restraints, Head ..............................................38
Rotation, Tires .............................................. 424
S
Safety ........................................................... 246
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 330
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 332
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 447
Safety Features ............................................. 246
Safety Information, Tire ................................ 406
Safety Tips .................................................... 330
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 333
Satellite Radio .............................................. 249
Saved Radio Stations ................................... 253
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 353
Seat Belt
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 301
Seat Belt Reminder ....................................... 107
Seat Belts ............................................ 293 , 330
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 297
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 297
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
............................................ 297
Child Restraints ........................................ 312
Extender ................................................... 299
Front Seat ........................................293 , 296
Inspection ................................................. 330
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 296
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 297
Operating Instructions .............................. 296
Pregnant Women ...................................... 300
Reminder .................................................. 294
Seat Belt Extender .................................... 299
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 294
Untwisting Procedure ................................ 297
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................ 429
Seats..................................................33 , 34, 35
Adjustment ...........................................33 , 35
Easy Entry ....................................................36
Folding Floor ................................................70
Head Restraints ...........................................38
Memory .......................................................32
Power...........................................................35
Rear Folding ................................................33
Tilting ...........................................................33
Security Alarm ........................................ 23 , 108
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 440
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................17
Service Assistance ........................................ 445
Service Contract ............................................ 446
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 456
457
Service Manuals
............................................448
Settings, Audio ..............................................253
Shift Lever Override .......................................347
Shifting ..........................................................140
Automatic Transmission .................. 141 , 146
Transfer Case ............................................161
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Case Neutral (N)
...................................216
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Case Neutral (N)
...................................217
Signals, Turn ..................................54 , 115, 332
Sirius Satellite Radio .....................................249
Favorites ...................................................252
Replay .......................................................251
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM
..........................................252
Favorites ...................................................252
Replay .......................................................251
Sliding Rear Window, Power ............................ 78
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............................422
Snow Plow .....................................................212
Snow Tires .....................................................419
Spare Tires ................................. 419 , 420, 421
Spark Plugs ...................................................440
Speed Control
Accel/Decel
...............................................165
Cancel .......................................................165
Resume .....................................................165
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ............ 164, 166
Starting .......................................118 , 119, 122
Automatic Transmission .................. 118 , 123
Button .........................................................18
Cold Weather ............................................ 122
Engine Block Heater ................................. 125
Engine Fails To Start ................................. 121
Starting And Operating .................................. 119
Starting Procedures ............................. 119 , 122
Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines) ........... 122
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) ............... 118
Steering
Power
....................................................... 163
Tilt Column ..................................................29
Wheel, Heated .............................................29
Wheel, Tilt....................................................29
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..................... 247
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ...... 247
Storage ............................................................66
Storage Compartment, Center Seat .................67
Storage, Vehicle ......................................65 , 427
Store Radio Presets ...................................... 253
Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 427
Sunglasses Storage .........................................69
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 281
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 368
T
Telescoping Steering Column ...........................29
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .............64
Tilt
Down
...........................................................35
Up ................................................................35
Tilt Steering Column .........................................29
Tip Start ............................................... 118 , 123
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 411
Tire Markings ................................................ 406
Tire Safety Information .................................. 406
Tires .................................. 332 , 414, 419, 425
Aging (Life Of Tires) ................................... 417
Air Pressure .............................................. 414
Chains ...................................................... 422
Changing .................................................. 339
Compact Spare ......................................... 419
Dual ........................................342 , 425, 432
General Information ........................ 414 , 419
High Speed ............................................... 415
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 415
Jacking...................................................... 339
Life Of Tires .............................................. 417
Load Capacity ........................................... 411
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
.........................................111 , 284
Quality Grading ......................................... 425
Radial ....................................................... 416
Replacement ............................................ 417
11
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 457
458
Rotation
....................................................424
Safety .............................................. 406 , 414
Sizes..........................................................407
Snow Tires .................................................419
Spare Tires ............................. 419 , 420, 421
Spinning ....................................................416
Trailer Towing ............................................206
Tread Wear Indicators ...............................417
Wheel Nut Torque .....................................432
To Open Hood .................................................. 79
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .......................205
Torque Converter Clutch ................................151
Towing ................................................. 200 , 350
Disabled Vehicle ........................................350
Guide.........................................................205
Recreational ..............................................214
Weight .......................................................205
Towing Behind A Motorhome .........................214
Traction .........................................................218
Traction Control .............................................281
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .............................281
Trailer Towing ................................................200
Hitches ......................................................204
Minimum Requirements ............................205
Mirrors......................................................... 46
Tips ...........................................................211
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................205
Wiring ........................................................209
Trailer Towing Guide ......................................205
Trailer Weight ................................................205
Transfer Case ............................................... 391
Electronically Shifted ....................... 153 , 156
Fluid ......................................................... 444
Transmission ................................................ 141
Automatic ............................... 141 , 146, 387
Fluid ......................................................... 444
Maintenance ............................................ 387
Shifting ..................................................... 140
Transporting Pets .......................................... 330
Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 417
Turn Signals .................................. 54 , 115, 402
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features
................................. 264
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
................................... 267
Uconnect Phone .................................. 259 , 260
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress
..................... 265
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress
................ 265
Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 269
Call Continuation ...................................... 266
Call Controls ............................................. 264
Call Termination ....................................... 266
Cancel Command ..................................... 260
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing
............... 262
Help Command ......................................... 260
Join Calls .................................................. 266
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Favorite ................................................ 262
Making A Second Call While Current
Call Is In Progress
................................. 266
Managing Your Favorites .......................... 263
Natural Speech ......................................... 259
Operation .................................................. 259
Overview ................................................... 258
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A
Mobile Phone ....................................... 260
Phonebook Download ............................... 263
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ............... 266
Power-Up .................................................. 269
Recent Calls.............................................. 264
Redial ....................................................... 266
To Remove A Favorite ............................... 263
Toggling Between Calls ............................. 266
Touch-Tone Number Entry ........................ 264
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone .. 266
Voice Command ....................................... 267
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ..............26
Passive Entry Programming .........................26
Uconnect System .......................................... 244
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 425
Unleaded Gasoline ........................................ 433
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .................... 297
USB ..................................................................72
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 458
459
V
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
...............431
Vehicle Loading ................................... 199 , 411
Vehicle Maintenance .....................................367
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .................... 10
Vehicle Storage ......................................65 , 427
Ventilated Seats .............................................. 37
Voice Command .............................................. 30
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................ 30
Voltmeter .......................................................128
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)
................................................. 111
Warranty Information .................................... 447
WARRANTY INFORMATION .................... 447
Washers, Windshield ..............................57 , 366
Washing Vehicle ........................................... 428
Water
Driving Through ........................................ 218
Water Separator
Diesel Fuel
................................................ 375
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......................... 421
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 421
Wheel Covers ................................................ 343
Wind Buffeting .................................................78
Window Fogging ...............................................65
Windows ..........................................................76
Power...........................................................76
Rear Sliding .................................................78
Reset Auto-Up ..............................................77
Windshield Defroster .................................... 331
Windshield Washers ....................... 56 , 57, 366
Fluid................................................... 57 , 366
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 380
Windshield Wipers ....................................56 , 57
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 380
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................57
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................58
Wireless Charging Pad .....................................76
11
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 459
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting
in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature
that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving
is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting
while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
reference for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle,
visit mopar.com/om
(U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this
vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC
reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without
imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in
substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase
replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far
below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public
transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates,
and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except
as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently
when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
`
RAM CHASSIS CAB
2021 OWNER’S MANUAL
2021 RAM CHASSIS CAB
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
U.S.
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, RADIO AND
WARRANTY BOOKS
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
First Edition V1
21_DPF_OM_EN_USC
